Acts 12:20 — Word Study

Greek	English	Parsing
ἦν	He was	Verb, imperfect, active
δὲ	now	Conjunction
ὁ	<the>	Article, nominative, singular
Ἡρῴδης	Herod	Noun, nominative, singular
θυμομαχῶν	furiously angry	Verb, present, active
Τυρίοις	with [the] Tyrians	Noun, dative, plural
καὶ	and	Conjunction
Σιδωνίοις·	Sidonians;	Adjective, dative, plural
ὁμοθυμαδὸν	with one accord	Adverb
δὲ	then	Conjunction
παρῆσαν	they were coming	Verb, imperfect, active
πρὸς	to	Preposition
αὐτὸν	him	Personal pronoun, accusative, singular
καὶ	And	Conjunction
πείσαντες	having gained	Verb, aorist, active
Βλάστον	Blastus	Noun, accusative, singular
τὸν	who [was]	Article, accusative, singular
ἐπὶ	over	Preposition
τοῦ	the	Article, genitive, singular
κοιτῶνος	bedchamber	Noun, genitive, singular
τοῦ	of the	Article, genitive, singular
βασιλέως	king	Noun, genitive, singular
ᾐτοῦντο	they were seeking	Verb, imperfect, middle
εἰρήνην,	peace,	Noun, accusative, singular
διὰ	because of	Preposition
τὸ	<the>	Article, accusative, singular
τρέφεσθαι	being nourished	Verb, present, passive
αὐτῶν	their	Personal pronoun, genitive, plural
τὴν	<the>	Article, accusative, singular
χώραν	region	Noun, accusative, singular
ἀπὸ	by	Preposition
τῆς	the	Article, genitive, singular
βασιλικῆς.¶	king’s.	Adjective, genitive, singular

	Reference	Text (BSB)
1	Genesis 10:15–19	And Canaan was the father of Sidon his firstborn, and of the Hittites,
2	Joshua 19:29	The border then turned back toward Ramah as far as the fortified city of Tyre, turned toward Hosah, and came out at the Sea in the region of Achzib,
3	Isaiah 23:1–4	This is the burden against Tyre: Wail, O ships of Tarshish, for Tyre is laid waste, without house or harbor. Word has reached them from the land of Cyprus.
4	Matthew 11:21–22	“Woe to you, Chorazin! Woe to you, Bethsaida! For if the miracles that were performed in you had been performed in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago in sackcloth and ashes.
5	Proverbs 17:14	To start a quarrel is to release a flood; so abandon the dispute before it breaks out.

Word	Editions carrying it	Missing from
ὁ <the>	TR, Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
Ἡρῴδης Herod	TR, Byz	NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ἦνeimi He was G1510 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular ¶

2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.

Amplified meaning

was highly displeased, angrie

Tyndale gloss

to be

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ha: The fifth letter of the Hebrew alphabet; transliterated in this Encyclopedia as "h." It came also to be used for the number 5. For name, etc., see ALPHABET.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

26%is

is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐNeg

ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς

οὗτος

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god

ἐγώ

ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά

σύ

ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

εἰμίHe was2457×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor

ἐν

ὁArticle theσύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t

ἐγώ

εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament

John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἄξιοςworthy, worthy of, deserving×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

δὲde now G1161 Conjunction ¶

2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.

Tyndale gloss

then

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

33%now

now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand

εἰCond

παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist

εἰμίI am, exist

περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

οὗτος

δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t

δέnow2787×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn

τὶς

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ὁho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ἩρῴδηςHērōdēs Herod G2264 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

43× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Herod refers to four Jewish kings, including Herod the Great, who appears in Matthew 2:1-23 and Acts 23:35. The name means heroic and is associated with the Herod dynasty. Herod Antipas and Herod Agrippa I are also mentioned in the Bible.

Tyndale gloss

Herod

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἡρῴδης refers to Herod, a name associated with several Jewish kings, including Herod the Great, Herod Antipas, and Herod Agrippa I. It is built from the root for 'hero' and appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in the Gospels and Acts, where it identifies these historical figures.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἡρῴδης (Rec. -ώδης), -ου, ὁ,

Herod;

Herod the Great: Mt 2, Ac 23:35.

Herod Antipas (ὁ τετραάρχης, Mt 14:1): Mt 14:1, 3, 6, Mk 6 8:15, Lk 1:5 3:1, 19 8:3 9:7, 9 13:31 23, Ac 4:27 13:1.

Herod Agrippa I: Ac 12:1, 6, 11, 19, 21 (cf. Ἀγρίππας (II)).†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἡρώδης (Hērōdēs) — Herod.

Ἡρῴδης (Rec. -ώδης), -ου, ὁ

Herod;

1. Herod the Great: Mat.2:1-23, Act.23:35.

2. Herod Antipas (ὁ τετραάρχης, Mat.14:1): Mat.14:1, 3 14:6, Mrk.6:1-56, Mrk.8:15, Luk.1:5 3:1, 19 8:3 9:7, 9 13:31, 23, Act.4:27 13:1.

3. Herod Agrippa I: Act.12:1, 6 12:11, 19 12:21 (cf. Ἀγρίππας (II)).†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἡρῴδης

Herodes

compound of heros (a "hero") and 1491; heroic; Herod, the name of four

Jewish kings:--Herod.

see GREEK for 1491

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἡρῴδης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Herod

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἡρῴδης hērōdēs 43x

Herod, pr. name. (1) Herod the Great, Mt. 2:1. (2) Herod Antipas, tetrarch of Galilee and Peraea, Mt. 14:1. (3) Herod Agrippa, Acts 12:1

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

her'-ud: The name Herod (Herodes) is a familiar one in the history of the Jews and of the early Christian church. The name itself signifies "heroic," a name not wholly applicable to the family, which was characterized by craft and knavery rather than by heroism. The fortunes of the Herodiam family are inseparably connected with the last flickerings of the flame of Judaism, as a national power, before it was forever extinguished in the great Jewish war of rebellion, 70 AD. The history of the Herodian family is not lacking in elements of greatness, but whatever these elements were and in whomsoever found, they were in every ease dimmed by the insufferable egotism which disfigured the family, root and branch. Some of the Herodian princes were undeniably talented; but these talents, wrongly used, left no marks for the good of the people of Israel. Of nearly all the kings of the house of…

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(hero-like). This family though of Idumean origin and thus alien by race, was Jewish in faith. I. HEROD THE GREAT was the second son of Antipater, an Idumean, who was appointed procurator of Judea by Julius Caesar, B.C. 47. Immediately after his father’s elevation when only fifteen years old, he received the government of Galilee and shortly afterward that of Coele-Syria. Though Josephus says he was 15 years old at this time, it is generally conceded that there must be some mistake, as he lived to be 69 or 70 years old, and died B.C. 4; hence he must have been 25 years old at this time.--ED.) In B.C. 41 he was appointed by Antony tetrarch of Judea. Forced to abandon Judea the following year, he fled to Rome, and received the appointment of king of Judea. In the course of a few years, by the help of the Romans he took Jerusalem (B.C. 37), and completely established his authority…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The name of four princes, Idumaeans by descent, who governed either the whole or a part of Judea, under the Romans, and are mentioned in the New Testament.

1. HEROD THE GREAT, Mt 2:1-23 Lu 1:5. He was the son of Antipater, an Idumaean, who was in high favor with Julius Caesar. At the age of fifteen years, Herod was constituted by his father procurator of Galilee under Hyrcanus II, who was then at the head of the Jewish nation; while his brother Phasael was intrusted with the same authority over Judea. In these stations they were afterwards confirmed by Antony, with the title of tetrarch, about the year 41 B. C. The power of Hyrcanus had always been opposed by his brother Aristobulus; and now Antigonus, the son of the latter, continued in hostility to Herod, and was assisted by the…

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

son of a hero

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%herod

herod100% · 44×

44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject70%adverbial21%object5%indirect object2%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 43 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

δέbut, on the otheἀρέσκωI please, serveαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle theἀκούωI hear, listenλέγωI say, speak

γάρfor

ὁArticle theμέλλωI am about to

ἡμέραa day

ἐνὁArticle the

βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emper

ὁArticle the

ἩρῴδηςHerod43×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

τετραάρχηςa tetrarchβασιλεύςa king, ruler, eγενέσιαa birthday celeb

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theΣουσάνναSusannahπᾶςall, the whole,

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὅτιthat, since, becἄγγελοςan angel, messenὁArticle the

φοβέωI fear, am terrified

ἐκεῖthere, yonder, tὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, exist

ἀναπέμπωI send up to a hκαίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἩρῴδης · 43× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts Mark

Across the New Testament4 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emperor×ἡμέραa day×ἀκούωI hear, listen×τετραάρχηςa tetrarch×ἸωάννηςJohn×ἀναπέμπωI send up to a higher tribunal, I send back×τέDisj×ἸουδαίαJudea×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaAgainst Flaccus 25c. AD 40

Γάιος Καῖσαρ Ἀγρίππᾳ τῷ Ἡρῴδου βασιλέως υἱωνῷ δίδωσι βασιλείαν τῆς παππῴας λήξεως τρίτην μοῖραν, ἣν Φίλιππος τετράρχης θεῖος ὢν αὐτῷ πρὸς πατρὸς ἐκαρποῦτο.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.394c. AD 75–95

μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἐτῶν πολλῶν διαγενομένων πάλιν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἡρώδης ἕτερον ἀνοίξας οἶκον ἀνείλετο χρήματα πολλά.

Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 6.1.2c. AD 110

ἀληθῶς ἐπὶ Ποντίου Πιλάτου καὶ Ἡρώδου τετράρχου καθηλωμένον ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἐν σαρκί, ἀφ̓ οὖ καρποῦ ἡμεῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ θεομακαρίστου αὐτοῦ πάθους, ἵνα ἄρῃ σύσσημον εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας διὰ τῆς ἀναστάσεως εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ πιστοὺς αὐτοῦ, εἴτε ἐν Ἰουδαίοις εἴτε ἐν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC 4th c. AD

P.Corn. 6Oxyrhyncha (Arsinoites)AD 17

ἔχομεν τὸ δάνειον παρὰ Ἡρακλέου τοῦ Ἡρακλέους τοῦ προνοοῦντος τῶν Ἡρακλέου τοῦ Ἡρακλέους τοῦ Ἡρώδου τὰς τοῦ ἐπισήμου νομίσματος ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς τετρακοσίας ὀγδοήκοντα τόκου ὡς ἐκ δραχμῆς μιᾶς τριωβόλου

P.Corn. 15Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 129

Θεαδελφείας πρόβατα κβ αἶγες β ἄρνες δ Ἡρώδῃ τῶι καὶ Τιβερίωι στρατηγῶι καὶ Ἀρχιβίωι βασιλικῶι γραμματεῖ Ἀρσινοΐτου Θεμίστου μερίδος παρὰ Πετερμούθιος τοῦ

P.Amh. 2 91ArsinoitesAD 159

Ἥρωνι Σαραπίωνος ἀφήλικι μετʼ ἐπιτρόπου Ἰσχυρίωνος τοῦ Ἡρώδου, ἐπακολουθούσης τῆς τοῦ ἀφήλικος μητρὸς Ἡρωίδος, παρὰ Ἀφροδισίου τοῦ Ἀκουσιλάου ἀπὸ τῆς μητροπόλεως. βούλομαι

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

θυμομαχῶνthumomacheō furiously angry G2371 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To quarrel fiercely, as seen in Acts 12:20, where people were highly displeased. This word describes a passionate fight. It's used to convey strong emotions.

Tyndale gloss

to quarrel

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word θυμομαχέω (*thumomacheō*) combines elements meaning 'anger' and 'to fight.' It describes a state of furious conflict or deep animosity, often used in a figurative sense to indicate being highly displeased. The New Testament uses it in Acts 12:20, where it conveys a sense of intense quarrel.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

*† θυμομαχέω, -ῶ

(θυμός, μάχομαι),

to fight desperately, have a hot quarrel: c. dat. pers., Ac 12:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θυμομαχέω, -@; (θυμός and μάχομαι) ; to carry on war with great animosity (Polyb., Diod., Dion. H., Plut.); ἡ be very angry, be exasperated [A.V. nighly displeased]: τινί, with one, Acts xii. 20. Cf. Kypke, Observy. ii p- 62 sq.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θυμομαχέω (thumomacheō) — to quarrel.

θῡμο-μᾰχέω,

to be angry, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; τισι [NT]

II. fight desperately, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; contend obstinately, τινι [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θυμομαχέω

thumomacheo

from a presumed compound of 2372 and 3164; to be in a furious fight,

i.e. (figuratively) to be exasperated:--be highly displeased.

see GREEK for 2372

see GREEK for 3164

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θυμομαχέω

v.

I am furiously angry with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θυμομαχέω thumomacheō 1x

to wage war fiercely; to be warmly hostile to, be enraged against, Acts 12:20*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θυμομαχέω θυ_μο-μα^χέω, to fight desperately, NTest., Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PAP-NSM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%furiously angry

furiously angry100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceθυμομαχέω · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ΤυρίοιςTurios with [the] Tyrians G5183 Noun · dative · plural · masculine ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Tyrios refers to something related to Tyre, a city in ancient Phoenicia. It describes people or things from Tyre, like in Mark 7:31. The word is used to identify someone's origin.

Amplified meaning

inhabitants, citizens, a city in ancient Phoenicia

Tyndale gloss

Tyre

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

Τύριος refers to a Tyrian, or an inhabitant of Tyre. The term appears in Acts 12:20, where it is used to describe people from that region. The word is derived from a root that indicates its connection to Tyre, and various lexicons consistently define it in this way.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Τύριος, -ου, ὁ, ἡ

a Tyrian: Ac 12:20.†

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Τύριος (Turios) — Tyre.

of Tyre, Tyrian , [Refs 5th c.BC], etc. (Middle Liddel)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Τύριος

Turios

from 5184; a Tyrian, i.e. inhabitant of Tyrus:--of Tyre.

see GREEK for 5184

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Τύριος, ου, ὁ, ἡ

n.m.

an inhabitant of Tyre

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Τύριος Tyrios 1x

a Tyrian, an inhabitant of Tyre, Acts 12:20*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Τύριος Τύριος, η, ον Τύρος of Tyre, Tyrian, Hdt., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%tyrians

tyrians100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

ConcordanceΤύριος · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 8.55c. AD 75–95

Διαμένει δὲ ἄχρι τῆς τήμερον τὰ τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τούτων ἀντίγραφα οὐκ ἐν τοῖς ἡμετέροις μόνον σωζόμενα βιβλίοις ἀλλὰ καὶ παρὰ Τυρίοις, ὥστε εἴ τις ἐθελήσειε τὸ ἀκριβὲς μαθεῖν, δεηθεὶς τῶν ἐπὶ τοῦ Τυρίων γραμματοφυλακείου δημοσίων εὕροι συμφωνοῦντα τοῖς…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59666Philadelphia (Arsinoites)257 BC

βασιλικά. ἔγγυοι τῶν κατὰ τὴν συγγραφὴν εἰς ἔκτεισιν οἱ συγγεγραμμένοι ἀλλήλων καὶ Ἡδύλος Δίωνος Τύριος τῶν περὶ Ἀπολλώνιον τὸν διοικητήν. ἡ δὲ συγγραφὴ ἥδε κυρία ἔστω, οὗ ἂν ἐπιφέρηται.

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίand8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

Σιδωνίοις·Sidōnios Sidonians; G4606 Adjective · dative · plural · masculine ¶

2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A Sidonian is someone from the city of Sidon, as mentioned in Luke 4:26. The term refers to the people who lived in the region of Sidon, known for their rich culture and trade. The Bible mentions the Sidonians as a distinct group of people.

Amplified meaning

a city in ancient Phoenicia

Tyndale gloss

Sidonian

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Σιδώνιος (i.e., *Sidonios*) means 'of Sidon' or 'Sidonian,' referring to either the region or its inhabitants. It appears in Luke 4:26 and Acts 12:20, where it describes the land of Sidon and its people, respectively. The word is consistently defined across lexicons, with no significant disagreements noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Σιδώνιος, -α, -ον

(< Σιδών),

of Sidon, Sidonian;

the region: sc. χώρα, Lk 4:26;

the people: Ac 12:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Σιδώνιος, -a, -ov, (Σιδών), belonging to Sidon, of Sidon: τῆς Σιδωνίας sc. χώρας. [R.V. in the land of Sidon], Lk. iv. 26 LT Tr WH (Hom. Od. 13, 285 [but -8or]) 5 Se δώνιοι, the inhabitants of Sidon, Acts xii. 20.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Σιδώνιος (Sidōnios) — Sidonian.

Σιδώνιος, -α, -ον

(Σιδών),

of Sidon, Sidonian;

__(a) the region: sc. χώρα, Luk.4:26;

__(b) the people: Act.12:20.†

(From Abbott-Smith. LSJ has no entry)

Strong's Greek Dictionary

∑ιδώνιος

Sidonios

from 4605; a Sidonian, i.e. inhabitant of Sidon:--of Sidon.

see GREEK for 4605

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Σιδώνιος, ία, ιον

Adj

Sidonian

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Σιδώνιος Sidōnios 2x

Sidonian; an inhabitant of Σιδών, Sidon, Acts 12:20; Lk. 4:26*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-DPM — Adjective · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DPM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

si-do'-ni-anz: Natives or inhabitants of Sidon (De 3:9; Jos 13:4,6; Jud 3:3; 1Ki 5:6).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

the Greek form of the word Zidonians, usually so exhibited in the Authorized Version of the Old Testament. It occurs (3:9; Joshua 13:4,6; Judges 3:3; 1 Kings 5:6) [ZIDON, OR SIDON]

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

50%sidonians

sidonians50% · 1×sidon50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ΣάρεπταZarephath

καίand, even, also, nam

Τύριοςan inhabitant of

ΣιδώνιοςSidonians;2×

what comes after →

πρός

γυνήa woman, wife, m

ὁμοθυμαδόνwith one mind, unani

δέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceΣιδώνιος · 2× in the New Testament

Acts Luke

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Eternity of the World 76c. AD 40

Βοηθὸς γοῦν ὁ Σιδώνιος καὶ Παναίτιος, ἄνδρες ἐν τοῖς Στωικοῖς δόγμασιν ἰσχυκότες, ἅτε θεόληπτοι, τὰς ἐκπυρώσεις καὶ παλιγγενεσίας καταλιπόντες πρὸς ὁσιώτερον δόγμα τὸ τῆς ἀφθαρσίας τοῦ κόσμου παντὸς ηὐτομόλησαν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.138c. AD 75–95

ἐγένοντο δὲ καὶ Χαναναίου παῖδες, Σιδώνιος, ὃς καὶ πόλιν ἐπώνυμον ἔκτισεν ἐν τῇ Φοινίκῃ, Σιδὼν δʼ ὑφʼ Ἑλλήνων καλεῖται·

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ὁμοθυμαδὸνhomothumadon with one accord G3661 Adverb ¶

11× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

United means being with one mind, as seen in Acts 1:14 and 2:46. It describes people acting together in agreement and harmony.

Amplified meaning

came together, met

Tyndale gloss

united

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὁμοθυμαδόν (homothumadon) is built from the roots for 'same' and 'passion' or 'mind.' It means 'with one mind' or 'unanimously,' and is used in the New Testament to describe collective agreement or unity, appearing in passages like Acts 1:14 and Romans 15:6. There is some debate among lexicographers about whether its usage in the New Testament should imply a stronger sense of unity than in earlier texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁμοθυμαδόν

(< ὁμός, θυμός),

[in LXX for יַחַד (freq. in Jb), Wi 10:20 18:5, 12, al.;]

with one mind, with one accord: Ac 1:14 2:46 4:24 5:12 7:57 8:6 12:20 15:25 18:12 19:29, Ro 15:6 (Hatch, Essays, 63 f., argues that the un-cl. sense together, which is found in Jb 3:18 38:33, Nu 24:24, Wi 18:5, 12 (but not 10:20), al., should be attached to the NT instances, but v. Abbott, Essays, 96; MM, xviii).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁμοθυμαδόν (fr. ὁμόθυμος, and this fr. 6uds and θυμός ; on advs. in -δόν [chiefly derived fr. nouns, and designating form or structure] as γνωμηδόν, ῥοιζηδόν, etc., cf. Bitm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 452), with one mind, of one accord, (Vulg. unanimiter [etc.]): Ro. xv. 6; Acts i. 14; ii. 46; iv. 24; Vii. 57; viii. 6; xii. 20; xv. 25; xviii. 12; xix. 29, and RG in ii. 1, (Arstph., Xen., Dem., Philo, Joseph., Hdian., Sept. Lam. ii.8; Job xvii. 16; Num. xxiv. 24, etc.) ; with ἅπαντες [LT WH πάντες] (Arstph. pax 484, and often in elass. Grk.), Acts v. 12 [ef. ii. 1 above].

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὁμοθυμαδόν. The sense wnanimzter, and not merely ‘‘together” to which Hatch (Zssays, p. 63f.) would limit this word in the NT as in the Greek versions of the OT, is supported by P Tebt I. 408 (B.c. 117) (= Selections, p. 28) σαφέστερον μετειληφὼς τοὺς ἐκ τῆς κώμης ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἀντέχεσθαι τῆς σῆς σκέπης, ‘having received certain information that the inhabitants of the village are with one accord claiming your protection” (Edd-), cf. Sy 329 (=*742)® (c. B.c. 85) ὁμοθυμαδὸν πάντων τῶν πολιτῶν ἐπιδεδωκότων ἑαυτοὺς els τοὺ[ς π]ερὶ τούτων ἀγῶνας, and 20. 732 (= 21104)?8 (5.6. 37-6) ἡ σύνοδος ἀποδεξαμένη τὴν ἐκτένειαν καὶ φιλοτιμίαν αὐτοῦ ὁμοθυμαδὸν προεβάλετο τοὺς εἰσοίσοντας αὐτοῖς τὰς καθηκούσας τιμὰς Λεύκιον κτλ. : cf. Ac 152° ἔδοξεν ἡμῖν γενομένοις ὁμοθυμαδόν --““1η6 decree is not the manifesto of a cabal or faction, but a decree of the entire Church convened together” (Hicks, Ο i. p. 45).…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁμοθυμαδόν (homothumadon) — united.

ὁμοθῡμ-ᾰδόν,

adverb with one accord, πάντες ὁ. [NT+5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁμοθυμαδόν

homothumadon

adverb from a compound of the base of 3674 and 2372;

unanimously:--with one accord (mind).

see GREEK for 3674

see GREEK for 2372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁμοθυμαδόν

Adv

with one mind, unanimously

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁμοθυμαδόν homothumadon 11x

with one mind, with one accord, unanimously, Acts 1:14; Rom. 15:6; together, at once, at the same time, Acts 2:1, 46; 4:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁμοθυμαδόν

θυμός with one accord, Dem.; mostly joined with πάντες, Ar., Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%one accord

one accord100% · 11×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 11 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

προσκαρτερέωI persist

εἰμίI am, existτέDisj

ἀκούωI hear, listen

δέbut, on the othe

εἰμίI am, exist

καίand, even, also,

ὁρμάωI rush

καίand, even, also,

ΦίλιπποςPhilip

ὁArticle the

ὁμοθυμαδόνwith one accord11×

what comes after →

ἐν

ὁArticle theεἷςone

ὁArticle the

προσευχήprayer, a place ἸουδαῖοςJewish

αἴρωI raise, lift up

φωνήa sound, noise,

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ἐν

ἐπί

αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁμοθυμαδόν · 11× in the New Testament

Acts Romans

Across the New Testament2 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

προσκαρτερέωI persist×τέDisj×ἀκούωI hear, listen×πρός×ὁρμάωI rush×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

יַ֫חַדunitedness80%H3162 · 16 verses

Counted over the 20 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Confusion of Tongues 58c. AD 40

θαυμάσιος μὲν οὖν ἡ λεχθεῖσα συμφωνία, θαυμασιωτάτη δὲ καὶ πάσας τὰς ἁρμονίας ὑπερβάλλουσα ἡ κοινὴ πάντων, καθ’ ἣν ὁ λαὸς ἅπας ὁμοθυμαδὸν εἰσάγεται λέγων·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 15.277c. AD 75–95

οὐ μὴν ἔπειθεν, ἀλλʼ ὑπὸ δυσχερείας ὧν ἐδόκουν ἐκεῖνον πλημμελεῖν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐξεβόων, εἰ καὶ πάντα δοκοῖεν οἰστά, μὴ φέρειν εἰκόνας ἀνθρώπων ἐν τῇ πόλει, τὰ τρόπαια λέγοντες·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

undated 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

BGU 8 1768Herakleopolites65 BC–45 BC

ξένην ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦ λαοῦ … … μετὰ τῆς πλείστης σπουδῆς καὶ χαρᾶς ὁμοθυμαδὸν εὐφημούντων κατήντησεν ἐπὶ τὸ τοῦ Ἡρακλέους ἱερὸν ἐν ὧι θυσίας σιας τε καὶ σπονδὰς

BASP 6 (1969), p. 17-AD 214–AD 215

βίον ἐφʼ ἡμῖν κληρονόμοις … γυναικ … … … υ … υ … συμβουλεῦσαι ὁμοθυμαδὸν … οὐκ ἀγνοεῖς … … τὸ τῶν μητρυιῶν ὄνομα ὡς … ιε … ως

Aegyptus 33 (1953), p. 71AD 301–AD 400

καὶ ἀπ … ηρι τοὺς πέντε καὶ ἐξ ἴσου κατὰ τοῦ … ἐπιβούλους ὁμοθυμαδὸν σκῆψιν κατὰ … ου ἐπιβάλλοντός μοι πατρικοῦ πέμπτου … ν τῷ καθόλου

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

δὲde then G1161 Conjunction ¶

2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.

Tyndale gloss

then

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

33%now

now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand

εἰCond

παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist

εἰμίI am, exist

περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche

οὗτος

δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t

δέthen2787×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theσύ

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn

τὶς

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

παρῆσανpareimi they were coming G3918 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural ¶

24× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Means to be present or nearby, like when Paul was present with the Corinthians in 1 Corinthians 5:3. It can also refer to something being at hand or available. This word is used in many books, including Acts and Revelation.

Tyndale gloss

be present

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πάρειμι (pareimi) means to be present or near. It can refer to people being present (e.g., Revelation 17:8) or to things being at hand, such as time or truth (e.g., Hebrews 12:11). The word is built from the roots for 'near' and 'to be.' It also conveys the sense of having arrived or come to a place, as seen in Matthew 26:50.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πάρ-ειμι,

[in LXX for בּוֹא, etc.;]

to be by, at hand or present;

of persons: Re 17:8; παρών (opp. to ἀπών), I Co 5:3, II Co 10:2, 11 13:2, 10; seq. ἐπί, c. gen., Ac 24:19; ἐνώπιον, Ac 10:33; ἐνθάδε, Ac 17:6; πρός, c. acc. pers., Ac 12:20, II Co 11:8, Ga 4:18, 20;

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πάρ-ειμι ; impf. 3 pers. pl. παρῆσαν ; fut. 3 pers. sing. παρέσται (Rev. xvii. 8 L T[not (as G Tr WH Alf., al.) πάρεσται ; see Bitm. Ausf. Spr. $108, Anm. 20; Chandler §803]); (mapa near, by, [see παρά, IV. 1 fin.] and εἰμί) ; Sept. chiefly for ΝΞ; as in Grk. auth. fr. Hom. down a. to be by, be athand, to have arrived, to be present: of persons, Lk. xiii. 1; Jn. xi. 28; Acts x. 21; Rev. xvii. 8; παρών, present (opp. to ἀπών), 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 2, 11; xiii. 2,10; ἐπί twos, before one (a judge), Acts xxiv. 19; ἐπί τινι, for (to do) something, Mt. xxvi. 50 Rec.; ἐπί τι, ibid. GL T Tr WH (on which see ἐπί, B. 2 a. ¢.); ἐνώmov θεοῦ, in the sight of God, Acts x. 33 [not Trmrg.]; ἐνθάδε, ib. xvii. 6 ; πρός τινα, with one, Acts xii. 20; 2 Co. xi. 9 (8); Gal. iv. 18, 20. of time: 6 καιρὸς πάρεστιν, Jn. vii. 6; τὸ παρόν, the present, Heb. xii. 11 (3 Mace. v. 17; see exx. fr. Grk. auth. in…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πάρειμι ΞΞ (1) ‘‘am present”: P Lille I. 121 (B.c. 250--249) ἐμνήσθην σοι καὶ παρόντι περὶ τῶν p (ἀρουρῶν), “1 have recalled to you in your presence (i.e by word of mouth) the affair of the hundred arourae,” P Lond 4222 (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, UPZ i. p. 310, Selections, p. 10) ὡς ἔτ[ι] σοῦ παρόντος πάντων ἐπεδεόμην, “ὁ while you were still at home I went short altogether,” P Amh II. 66% (a.p. 124) παρεῖναι τοὺς μαρτυρῆσαι δυναμένους τὸ[ν] φόν[ο]ν, ** that there were present persons able to witness to the murder ” (Edd.), and P Oxy VII. 1070°° (iii/a.p.) kar’ ὄψιν παρών, “when with you in person” (Ed.); (2) ‘have come”: P Par 4618 (B.c. 153) (= UPZ i. p 338) παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρὸς σέ, P Ryl 11. 774 (A.D. 192) παρὼν elev), ““came forward and said.’’ Field (Votes, p. 65) prefers this latter meaning in Lk 13!: see also Mt 26° ai. We may add a few exx. of prepositional phrases—P Tebt 11.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πάρειμι (pareimi) — be present.

πάρειμι

(εἰμί sum), infinitive -εῖναι, Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural παρέᾱσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect subjunctive παρέω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive παρέμμεναι [Refs 8th c.BC+], participle παρεών [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Epic dialect imperfect παρέην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular παρῆας variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural πάρεσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Attic dialect imperfect παρῆ [Refs 4th c.BC+]; in later Greek παρήμην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: Epic dialect future παρέσσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—to be by or present, ὑμεῖς θεαί ἐστε πάρεστέ τε ἴστε τε πάντα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πάρα used for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently in participle, ποίπνυον παρεόντε [Refs], etc.; ἀπεόντα νόῳ παρεόντα [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πάρειμι

pareimi

from 3844 and 1510 (including its various forms); to be near, i.e. at

hand; neuter present participle (singular) time being, or (plural)

property:--come, X have, be here, + lack, (be here) present.

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 1510

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πάρειμι

v.

I am present, am near

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πάρειμι pareimi 24x

to be beside; to be present, Lk. 13:1; to have come, Mt. 26:50; Jn. 7:6; 11:28; Col. 1:6; to be in possession, Heb. 13:5; 2 Pet. 1:9, 12; part. παρών, οῦσα, όν, present, 1 Cor. 5:3; τὸ παρόν, the present time, the present, Heb. 12:11

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-IAI-3P — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

44%being present

being present44% · 11×present16% · 4×come12% · 3×you are here?4% · 1×they were coming4% · 1×appear4% · 1×be present4% · 1×it will exist4% · 1×other renderings8% · 2×

25 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb83%adverbial17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 24 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

ἐνμένDisjἀρκέωI am sufficient,

καίand, even, also, nam

τοιοῦτοςεἰμίI am, exist

ὅς

ἐπίδιά

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁμοθυμαδόνwith one mind, uθέλωI will, wish, de

ὡςas, like as, how, wh

κρίνωI judge, decide,προλέγωI forewarn

πάρειμιthey were coming24×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

δέbut, on the otheοὕτωthus, so, in thiἔργονwork, labor, act

πρός

σύαὐτός

δέbut, on the other ha

τὶςὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

φωνέωI crow, shout, sκατηγορέωI accuse, charge

τότεthen

προσέρχομαιI come near, con

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπάρειμι · 24× in the New Testament

2 Corinthians Acts 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Galatians Hebrews John Colossians Luke Matthew Revelation

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

πρός×ἄπειμι (I)I am absent×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.43c. AD 40

ἡ δὲ αἴσθησις οὔτε μελλόντων ἀντιλαμβάνεται οὐδ’ ἀνάλογόν τι πάσχει προσδοκίᾳ ἢ ἐλπίδι οὔτε παρεληλυθότων μέμνηται, ἀλλ’ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἤδη κινοῦντος καὶ παρόντος μόνου πάσχειν πέφυκεν, οἷον ὀφθαλμὸς λευκαίνεται νῦν ὑπὸ τοῦ παρόντος λευκοῦ, ὑπὸ δὲ τοῦ μὴ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.53c. AD 75–95

Ἄβελος μὲν γὰρ ὁ νεώτερος δικαιοσύνης ἐπεμελεῖτο καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ πραττομένοις παρεῖναι τὸν θεὸν νομίζων ἀρετῆς προενόει, ποιμενικὸς δʼ ἦν ὁ βίος αὐτῷ·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 7th c. AD

P.Grenf. 2 31Pathyris105 BC

τοῦ ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἀρχείου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς Ε καὶ τοὺς τούτων τόκους· ὃς καὶ παρὼν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου ὁ Χαιρήμων ἀνωμολογήσατο ἀπέχειν καὶ μὴ ἐπικαλεῖν περὶ τοῦ μέρους δανείου

P.Grenf. 2 30Pathyris103 BC

ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐν Παθύρει ἀρχείου ἐν τῷ ιε τοῦ καὶ ιβ ἔτει· ὃς καὶ παρὼν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Ἀλμαφέως ἀνομολογήσατο ἀπέχειν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανοβχούνιος καὶ τῶν τούτου

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

λιβὸς περίχωμα ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα τρία · οἳ καὶ παρόντες ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου ἀνωμολογήσαντο Νεχθανοῦπις καὶ οἱ τούτου υἱοὶ ἀπέχειν τὴν λύτρα τῆς σημαινομένης

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

πρὸςpros to G4314 Preposition ¶

700× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A preposition showing direction or relationship, like towards or with something, as seen in Mark 5:11 and John 18:16. This means indicating movement or direction. It's about showing proximity or connection.

Tyndale gloss

to/with

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πρός is a preposition that indicates direction, proximity, or relation. It can be used with the genitive to denote motion from a place, with the dative for local proximity, and with the accusative to express motion towards a place or object. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as Acts 27:34 for benefit and Mark 5:11 for proximity.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρός,

prep. c. gen., dat., acc.

C. gen., of motion from a place, from the side of, hence metaph., in the interests of, Ac 27:34 (cf. Page, in l.).

C. dat., of local proximity, hard by, near, at: Mk 5:11, Lk 19:37, Jo 18:16 20:11, 12, Re 1:13.

C. acc., of motion or direction towards a place or object, to, towards.

Of place,

after verbs of motion or of speaking and other words with the idea of direction: ἔρχομαι, ἀναβαίνω, πορεύομαι, λέγω, ἐπιστολή, etc., Mt 3:14, Mk 6:51, Lk 11:5, Jo 2:3,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρός, a preposition, i.q. Epic mpori, from πρό and the adverbial suffix τι, (cf. the German vor . . . hin [Curtius § 381]); it is joined I. with the AccusaTIvE, to, towards, Lat. ad, denoting direction towards athing, or position and state looking towards a thing (W. § 49h. p. 404 (378)): it is used 1. of the goal or limit towards which a movement is directed: πρός twa or τι, a. prop. after verbs of going, departing, running, coming, ete.: ἄγω, Jn. xi. 15; ἀναβαίνω, Mk. vi. 51; Jn. xx. 17; Acts xv. 2; ἀνακάμπτω, Mt. ii. 12; Acts xvili. 21; ἀνέρχομαι, Gal. i. 17 [1]. Tr mrg. arépy.]; ἀπέρχομαι, Mt. » xiv. 25 [Rec.]; Mk. iii. 13, etc.; πρὸς ἑαυτόν, to his house, Lk. xxiv. 12 [T om. L Trbr. WH reject the ys.; Tr reads mp. αὐτόν ; some connect the phrase w. θαυμάζων (see 2 Ὁ. below) ]; Jn. xx. 10 [Ὁ Tr αὐτούς, WH air. (cf. s. v. αὑτοῦ sub fin.)]; γίνεσθαι πρός τινα, to come to one, 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πρός reference to place PSI IV. 31178 (iv/A.D.?) πρ]ὸς τὴν Aavitk.ay τῆς κοίλης Dupials. Headlam (on Herodas VII. 123) holds that τὰ πρὸς τὴν θύραν in Mk 2? ‘‘is surely idiomatic (not vulgar as Moulton thinks) ‘spots which commanded the door’”: cf. Mt 310, Lk 35. For πρός, ‘‘with,” as in Jn ΤΡ, Heb 41%, cf. Epict. iv. 9. 13 πρὸς ὃν οὐδείς ἐστί σου πιθανώτερος (see Sharp Ξε, p. 92). And for the possibility that the difficult πρός in Mk 63, οἷ", 14%, Jn 1}, 1 Jn 1?, is to be explained as an Aramaism, see Rendel Harris Prologue to S. John’s Gospel p. 8f., and Burney Avamaic Origin of the Fourth Gospel p. 28 f. (6) of time = ‘‘for’’ (a time) and no longer—BGU I. 1131? (A.D. 143) βουλόμενος παρεπιδημεῖν πρὸς καιρόν (cf. Lk 818), P Oxy I. 6714 (A.D. 338) πρὸς ὀλίγον εἰσχύει, ‘‘withstands but for a short time” (cf. Jas 4), and P Flor III. 282° (A.D. 520) πρὸς ὅλον χρόνον. (c) of mental…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρός (pros) — to/with.

πρός,

preposition, expressing direction,

__A on the side of, in the direction of, hence with genitive, dative, and accusative, from, at, to: Epic dialect also προτί and ποτί, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] usually with accusative, more rarely with dative, and each only once with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—dialectal forms: Doric dialectποτί (which see) and ποί, but Cretan dialect πορτί [Refs], Argive προτ(ί) [Refs 7th c.BC+] πός [Refs 4th c.BC+]., also sometimes in Asia Minor in compounds, see at {ποσάγω},{ποσφέρω}; Aeolic dialect πρός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; πρές [Refs 6th c.AD+]; Pamphylian περτ (ί) [Refs] (With προτί, πρός cf. Sanskrit práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slavonic protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Latin pretium: ποτί (which see) and πός are not cognate) [Refs 4th c.BC+] refers to that from which something…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρός

pros

a strengthened form of 4253; a preposition of direction; forward to,

i.e. toward (with the genitive case, the side of, i.e. pertaining to;

with the dative case, by the side of, i.e. near to; usually with the

accusative case, the place, time, occasion, or respect, which is the

destination of the relation, i.e. whither or for which it is

predicated):--about, according to , against, among, at, because of,

before, between, (where-)by, for, X at thy house, in, for intent, nigh

unto, of, which pertain to, that, to (the end that), X together, to

(you) -ward, unto, with(-in). In the comparative case, it denotes

essentially the same applications, namely, motion towards, accession

to, or nearness at.

see GREEK for 4253

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρός

Prep.

to, towards, with

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρός pros 700x

from; met. for the benefit of, Acts 27:34; with a dative, near, by, at, by the side of, in the vicinity of, Mk. 5:11; Lk. 19:37; with an accusative, used of the place to which anything tends, to, unto, towards, Mt. 2:12; 3:5, 13; at, close upon, Mt. 3:10; Mk. 5:22; near to, in the vicinity of, Mk. 6:45; after verbs of speaking, praying, answering to a charge, etc., to, Mt. 3:15; 27:14; of place where, with, in, among, by, at, etc., Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πρός prep. with gen., implying motion from a place; with dat., abiding at a place; with acc., motion to a place

WITH GEN.,

of Place, from, from forth, Hom., Soph.

on the side or quarter of, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος islands looking (as it were) from Elis, i. e. towards Elis, Od.; πρὸς τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου ἵδρυται μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Στρύμονος lies more towards (i. e. nearer) the Hellespont than the Strymon, Hdt.; ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο πρὸς Ὀλύνθου Thuc., etc.:—often with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν πρὸς βορέαο, αἱ δ᾽ αὖ πρὸς νότου one looking north wards, the other south wards, Od.; so, οἰκέουσι πρὸς νότου ἀνέμου Hdt., etc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

69%to

to69% · 506×with7% · 48×for6% · 42×toward4% · 30×against3% · 21×at3% · 20×unto2% · 18×other renderings5% · 37×other renderings1% · 10×

732 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 32 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial93%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 700 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ἔρχομαιI come, go

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theνύξthe night, night

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakὁArticle theπαραγίνομαιI appear, come,

αὐτός

ἄγωI leadφέρωI carry, bear, bμαθητήςa learner, disci

ἐγώ

ὑπέρσῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descenden

πρόςto700×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, θεόςGod, a godμαθητήςa learner, disci

αὐτός

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,

σύ

καίand, even, also,ἐνἔρχομαιI come, go

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theοὐNeg

ἀλλήλων

τίςIrgλέγωI say, speakμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρός · 700× in the New Testament

Luke Acts John Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Hebrews Romans Ephesians 1 Thessalonians Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἔρχομαιI come, go×ἀποστέλλωI send forth, send, send away, dismiss×ἀλλήλων×πέμπωI send×ἄγωI lead×ἔξωwithout, outside×ἐπιστρέφωI turn back to×παραβολήa parable, comparison×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.3c. AD 100

τούτων οὖν μενόντων τὰ πρὸς κύριον ἁγνῶς, συνευφραίνονται αὐτοῖς σοφία, σύνεσις, ἐπιστήμη, γνῶσις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῆ

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου

P.Grenf. 1 30Pathyris104 BC

πᾶσι χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διὰ παντὸς εὐημερεῖν. ὑγιαίνομεν δὲ καὶ αὐτοί. μεταλαβόντες τοὺς συντετελεσμένους πρὸς τοὺς ἀσεβεῖς Ἑρμωνθίτας ἀγῶνας μεγάλως ἐχάρημεν. ἐπεὶ οὖν προκεχειρίκαμεν προστάτην τοῦ μεγίστου θεοῦ Νεχθφαραῦτος

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

αὐτὸνautos him G846 Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.

Amplified meaning

in his presence

Tyndale gloss

it/s/he

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-ASM — Personal pronoun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-ASM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%him

him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

πρός

λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god

αὐτόςhim5550×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὅς

εἰς

ὁArticle theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction ¶

8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.

Tyndale gloss

and

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

89%and

and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐνἐπίπρός

σύ

χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,

ἐγώ

πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god

εἰμίI am, exist

αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe

καίAnd8978×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός

οὐNeg

εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a

ὁράωI see, look upon, ex

ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei

ἐν

ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

πείσαντεςpeithō having gained G3982 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine ¶

52× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To persuade means to convince someone by argument or evidence, as seen in Matthew 28:14 where the guards were persuaded to spread a false story. It can also mean to trust or have confidence in someone, like in 1 John 3:19 where it refers to trusting in God's love.

Amplified meaning

gained, obtained, friendship, alliance

Tyndale gloss

to persuade

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πείθω (peithō) is a verb meaning to persuade or convince, often by fair means. It can also imply trust or confidence, as seen in its passive forms where it means to be persuaded or to believe. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as persuading others (Acts 18:4) and being confident (Romans 8:38). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πείθω,

[in LXX chiefly for בּטח, its parts and derivatives;]

Active;

trans., to apply persuasion ("conative" in pres.; v. M, Pr., 147), to prevail upon or win over, persuade: absol., Mt 28:14, Ac 19:26; seq. περί, c. gen. rei, Ac 19:8; c. acc. pers., Ac 12:20 14:19 18:4, II Co 5:11, Ga 1:10; τ. καρδίας ἡμῶν, I Jo 3:19; c. acc. seq. περί, Ac 28:23; c. acc. et inf., Ac 13:43 26:28 (v. Field, Notes, 141 ff.); c. acc. seq. ἵνα (Plut.),

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πείθω [ (fr. r. meaning ‘to bind’; allied w. πίστις, fides, foedus, ete.; Curtius § 327; Vanitek p. 592)]; impf. ἔπειGov; fut. πείσω; 1 aor. ἔπεισα ; 2 pf. πέποιθα; plupf. ἐπεmoibew (Lk. xi. 22); Pass. [or Mid., pres. πείθομαι; impf. ἐπειθόμην]; pf. πέπεισμαι; 1 aor. ἐπείσθην ; 1 fut. πεισθήcopa (Lk. xvi. 31); fr. Hom. down; 1. Active; 8. to persuade, i. e. to induce one by words to believe: absol. πείσας μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον, Acts xix. 26; τί, to cause belief in a thing (which one sets forth), Acts xix. 8 RGT [ef. B. 150 (131) n.] (Soph. O. C. 1442); περί w. gen. of the thing, ibid. L Tr WH; τινά, one, Acts xviii. 4; τινά τι, one of a thing, Acts xxviii. 23 Ree. (Hadt. 1, 163; Plat. apol. p. 37a., and elsewhere; [cf. B. u.s.]); τινὰ περί twos, concerning a thing, ibid. GLT Tr WH. b. as in class. Grk. fr. Hom. down, w. an ace. of a pers., to make friends of, win one’s favor, gain…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πείθω. For the conative present ‘‘ apply persuasion,” ‘‘seek to persuade,”’ as in Ac 2678, see Proleg. p. 147. The corresponding aor. ἔπεισα is seen in P Tor I. rit 86 (ΒΟ, 116) εἴπερ ye δὴ ἐνόμιζεν ἔχειν τι δίκαιον, δι’ od δύναται τὸν κριτὴν πεῖσαι, and BGU I. 164° (ii/iii A.D.) παρακαλῶ οὖν

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πείθω (peithō) — to persuade.

πείθω,

persuade, imperfect ἔπειθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect and Lyric poetry πεῖθον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future πείσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive πεισέμεν [Refs]: aorist 1 ἔπεισα [Refs 8th c.BC+] has only optative πείσειε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect participle πείσαις [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 2 ἔπῐθον [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in Epic dialect reduplicate forms πεπίθωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέπεικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle and passive πείθομαι, obey, [Refs 8th c.BC+], etc.: future πείσομαι[Refs], etc.: aorist 2 ἐπῐθόμην, Epic dialect πιθόμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive πίθωμαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive πιθέσθαι [Refs]; participle πιθόμενος [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 middle ἐπεισάμην [Refs 4th c.BC+] W.: future passive πεισθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἐπείσθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect πέπεισμαι [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πείθω

peitho

a primary verb; to convince (by argument, true or false); by analogy,

to pacify or conciliate (by other fair means); reflexively or

passively, to assent (to evidence or authority), to rely (by inward

certainty):--agree, assure, believe, have confidence, be (wax)

conflent, make friend, obey, persuade, trust, yield.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πείθω

v.

I persuade, urge

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πείθω peithō 52x

pluperfect, ἐπεποίθειν, to persuade, seek to persuade, endeavor to convince, Acts 18:4; 19:8, 26; 28:23; to persuade, influence by persuasion, Mt. 27:20; Acts 13:43; 26:28; to incite, instigate, Acts 14:19; to appease, render tranquil, to quiet, 1 Jn. 3:19; to strive to conciliate, aspire to the favor of, Gal. 1:10; to pacify, conciliate, win over, Mt. 28:14; Acts 12:20; pass. and mid. to be persuaded of, be confident of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πείθω Act. to prevail upon, win over, persuade, τινά Hom., etc.:—c. acc. pers. et inf. to persuade one to do, Il., etc.; also, π. τινὰ ὥστε δοῦναι, etc., Hdt.; π. τινα ὡς χρή Plat.; π. τινὰ εἴς τι Thuc.; in part., πείσας by persuasion, by fair means, Soph.

Special usages:

to talk over, mislead, ἔληθε δόλωι καὶ ἔπεισεν Ἀχαιούς Od.

to prevail on by entreaty, Hom.

π. τινὰ χρήμασι to bribe, Hdt.; so, π. ἐπὶ μισθῶι or μισθῶι id. Hdt., Thuc.: so, πείθειν τινά alone, Xen., NTest.

c. dupl. acc., πείθειν τινά τι to persuade one of a thing, Hdt., Aesch., etc.

Pass. and Mid. to be prevailed on, won over, persuaded, absol., Hom., attic; the imperat. πείθου or πιθοῦ listen, comply, Trag.; c. inf. to be persuaded to do, Soph.; also, πείθεσθαι ὥστε . .…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-AAP-NPM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

13%persuaded

persuaded13% · 7×i have been persuaded11% · 6×persuading7% · 4×having trusted7% · 4×having been persuaded of6% · 3×having persuaded4% · 2×obey4% · 2×already trusting4% · 2×other renderings44% · 24×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 31 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 52 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ἐγώ

ἡγεμώνa governorκαταλιθάζωI stone down, stὀλίγος& Adv

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςἸουδαῖοςJewishδιαλέγομαιI converse, addr

μήNeg

οὖνtherefore, thenἵναin order that, sἀλήθειαtruth

αὐτός

προσλαλέωI speak toἐκἔμπροσθεν

ὁArticle the

τὶςεἰς

πείθωhaving gained52×

what comes after →

δέbut, on the other ha

αὐτόςἐνὁArticle the

ὁArticle the

ὄχλοςa crowdλέγωI say, speakδεσμόςa bond, chain

αὐτός

διαλύωI break up, dispδιασκορπίζωI scatter, winnoπροσμένωI remain, persis

ἐπί

ὁArticle theἑαυτοῦπᾶςall, the whole,

καίand, even, also, nam

σύὁArticle theπροσκληρόωI assign by lot,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπείθω · 52× in the New Testament

Acts Philippians Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Luke Galatians Matthew 2 Timothy 1 John 2 Thessalonians James

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

περί×ὄχλοςa crowd×ἑαυτοῦ×τέDisj×ὅσος×ἸουδαῖοςJewish×βασιλείαkingship, sovereignty, authority, rule, king×ἀλήθειαtruth×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

בָּטַחtrust37%H982 · 34 verses

Counted over the 91 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 165c. AD 40

ἐπειδὰν γὰρ ἑκάστη τῶν αἰσθήσεων τοῖς φίλτροις αὐτῆς ὑπαχθῇ, χαίρουσαι τοῖς προτεινομένοις, ἐπὶ χρωμάτων μὲν καὶ σχημάτων ποικιλίαις ὄψις, ἐπὶ δὲ φωνῶν ἐμμελείαις ἀκοή, ἐν δὲ χυλῶν ἡδύτησι γεῦσις, κἀν ταῖς τῶν ἀναθυμιωμένων ἀτμῶν εὐωδίαις ὄσφρησις,…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.21c. AD 75–95

τοῦτο δὴ παιδεῦσαι βουληθεὶς Μωυσῆς τὸ παίδευμα τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ πολίτας τῆς τῶν νόμων θέσεως οὐκ ἀπὸ συμβολαίων καὶ τῶν πρὸς ἀλλήλους δικαίων ἤρξατο τοῖς ἄλλοις παραπλησίως, ἀλλʼ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν καὶ τὴν τοῦ κόσμου κατασκευὴν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἀναγαγὼν καὶ…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

SB 1 5231Psinachis (Arsinoites)AD 11

Ταμεσθασύτμιος, ἡ τούτου γυνή, λέγουσα γράφειν καὶ ποιεῖν κατὰ πάντα τὰ προγεγραμμένα οἷς, καὶ πέπεισμαι. ἀντίγραφον χαραγμοῦ καὶ ὑπογραφῆς Ἑλληνικοῖς γράμμασι, ὡς ὑπόκειται. ἔτους δα γεγρα … Ἁθὺρ κδ.

SB 1 5275Psinachis (Arsinoites)AD 11

Ταμεσθασύτμιος, ἡ τούτου γυνή, λέγουσα γράφειν καὶ ποιεῖν κατὰ πάντα τὰ προγεγραμμένα οἷς, καὶ πέπεισμαι. ἀντίγραφον ἀπʼ ἀντιγράφου χαραγμοῦ καὶ ὑπογραφῆς Ἑλληνικοῖς γράμμασι, ὡς ὑπόκειται. ἔτους μα Καίσαρος, Ἁθὺρ

P.Mich. 5 322 aTebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 46

ἐξαλλοτριοῦν μηδὲ ἑτέροις ἀπομερίζειν εἰ μὴ τοῖς προγεγραμμένοις καθὼς πρόκιται, οἷς καὶ ἐξ ἀναγνώσεως πέπεισμαι Τετουσῖρις ἡ καὶ Διονυσία Μάρωνος τοῦ καὶ Μαρεψήμιος μετὰ κυρίου ἐμοῦ τοῦ τῆς ἀδελφῆς

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ΒλάστονBlastos Blastus G986 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Blastus was an officer who served under Herod Agrippa, as mentioned in Acts 12:20. He held a high position, similar to a chamberlain. The KJV simply refers to him as Blastus.

Amplified meaning

a high-ranking official

Tyndale gloss

Blastus

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Βλάστος (Blastos) refers to a proper name, specifically Blastus, who was a chamberlain of King Herod Agrippa I, mentioned in Acts 12:20. The entries indicate that the word may also relate to concepts of growth, such as a shoot or bud, but in the New Testament context, it is primarily a personal name.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Βλάστος, -ου, ὁ,

Blastus, chamberlain of Agrippa: Ac 12:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Βλάστος [i. 6. a sprout], -ov, 6, Blastus, the chamberlain of king Herod Agrippa I.: Acts xii. 20 [cf. Mey. ad loc. ].

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Βλάστος (Blastos) — Blastus.

βλαστός, ὁ,

shoot, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; bud, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; embryo, germ, [Refs]; ὁ τοῦ β. καιρός, i. e. Spring, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

2. blossom, β. κρίνου [LXX]

II. offsprmg, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

Βλάστος

Blastos

perhaps the same as the base of 985; Blastus, an officer of Herod

Agrippa:--Blastus.

see GREEK for 985

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Βλάστος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

Blastus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Βλάστος Blastos 1x

Blastus, pr. name, Acts 12:20*

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

blas'-tus (Blastos, "shoot"): The chamberlain of Herod Agrippa I, whose services as an intermediary between them and the king were gained by the people of Tyre and Sidon. These cities were dependent on Palestine for corn and other provisions, and when Herod, on the occasion of some commercial dispute, forbade the export of foodstuffs to Tyre and Sidon, they were at his mercy and were compelled to ask for peace. "Having made Blastus the king's chamberlain their friend," probably by means of a bribe, the Phoenician embassy was given an opportunity of setting their case before Herod (Ac 12:20 ff).

S. F. Hunter

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Blastus

Chamberlain to king Herod Agrippa I. (Acts 12:20). Such persons generally had great influence with their masters.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(sprout), the chamberlain of Herod Agrippa I. (Acts 12:20)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A chamberlain of Herod Agrippa, bribed to favor the men of Tyre and Sidon, Ac 12:20.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%blastus

blastus100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

ConcordanceΒλάστος · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Clement of Rome

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 23.4c. AD 96

ὧ ἀνόητοι, συμβάλετε ἑαυτοὺς ξύλῳ: λάβετε ἄμπελον: πρῶτον μὲν φυλλοροεῖ, εἶτα βλαστὸς γίνεται, εἶτα φύλλον, εἶτα ἄνθος, καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ὄμφαξ, εἶτα σταφυλὴ παρεστηκυῖα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 1st c. AD

P.Athen.. 4Arsinoites301 BC–202 BC

τῆι ἐμῆι μερίδι ῥῖποι ὅπως γένωνται καὶ περιφραχθῆι κύκλωι τὸ κτῆμα, ἵνα μήτε ὁ βλαστὸς ὑπὸ τῶν βοῶν κατέσθηται μήτε ἡ ὑπώρα ὑπὸ τῶν ὑαινῶν καὶ τῶν ὄνων κατέσθηται

BGU 7 1557Philadelphia (Arsinoites)211 BC–205 BC

Ἑλίκη … Εἰρήνη α … Γενῆς α δ … Στύραξ α δ … Βλάστος α … Νίκων α

BGU 1 37ArsinoitesAD 50

r Μυσταρίων Στοτοήτι τῶι ἰδίωι πλεῖστα χαίρειν. ἔπεμψα ὑμῖν Βλάστον τὸν ἐμὸν χάριν διχήλων ξύλων εἰς τοὺς ἐλαιῶνάς μου. ὅρα οὖν μὴ αὐτὸν κατάσχῃς·

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τὸνho who [was] G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁwho [was]19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ἐπὶepi over G1909 Preposition ¶

886× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A preposition meaning upon, to, or against, often used to show location or direction, like in Matthew 6:10 where Jesus teaches us to pray for God's will to be done on earth. It can also indicate a sense of time or order.

Tyndale gloss

upon/to/against

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),

prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),

with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.

C. gen.,

of place, answering the question, where?

of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.

ἐπί,

Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.

__A WITH GEN.:

__A.I of Place,

__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπί

epi

a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,

place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive

case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,

etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,

etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as

(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a

place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf

of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),

with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,

etc. (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπί

Prep.

on, to, against, on the basis of, at

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπί epi 890x

(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐπί

on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.

prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.

WITH GEN.:

of Place,

with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.

not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

28%upon

upon28% · 258×on22% · 203×to8% · 77×in7% · 62×over7% · 59×at6% · 57×against4% · 38×for4% · 37×other renderings13% · 116×

907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaαὐτόςλευκόςwhite, bright

αὐτός

δέbut, on the otheφιάληa shallow and flκεφαλήthe head

κάθημαιI sit, am seated

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,γυνήa woman, wife, m

πίπτωI fall, fall under

δέbut, on the otheκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

ἔρχομαιI come, go

ὁδόςa way, road, jouγάρforκαίand, even, also,

ἐπίover886×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

γῆthe earth, soil,κεφαλήthe headθρόνοςa throne, seat

αὐτός

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theὅτιthat, since, bec

πᾶςall, the whole, ever

ὁArticle theὅςκαίand, even, also,

σύ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole,

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle theὅς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπί · 886× in the New Testament

Acts Luke Revelation Matthew Mark John Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

γῆthe earth, soil, land×κάθημαιI sit, am seated×πίπτωI fall, fall under×θρόνοςa throne, seat×κεφαλήthe head×θάλασσαthe sea, lake×λίθοςa stone×πρόσωπονthe face, countenance, surface×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. AD 4th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τοῦho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

κοιτῶνοςkoitōn bedchamber G2846 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word refers to a bedroom or private chamber. In Acts 12:20, it describes a chamberlain, a high-ranking official. The word is used to convey a sense of private or intimate space.

Amplified meaning

personal aide, attendant

Tyndale gloss

bedroom/chamberlain

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word κοιτών (i.e., *koitōn*) means 'bed-chamber' or 'bedroom' and is derived from the word for 'bed' (κοίτη). It is used in the New Testament to refer to a chamberlain in Acts 12:20. The term appears in various contexts, including nursery and grave, but its primary meaning remains a sleeping room.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κοιτών, -ῶνος, ὁ

(< κοίτη = Att.., δωμότιον, v. Kennedy, Sources, 40),

[in LXX chiefly for חֶדֶר, II Ki 4:7, Jl 2:16, I Es 3:3, al.;]

a bed-chamber; ὁ ἐπὶ τοῦ κ., a chamberlain: Ac 12:20.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κοιτών, -Gvos, ὁ, (fr. κοίτη ; cf. νυμφών etc.), a sleepingroom, bed-chamber: 6 ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτ. the officer who is over the bed-chamber, the chamberlain, Acts xii. 20 (2 S. iv. 7; Ex. viii. 3; 1 Esdr. iii.3; the Atticists censure the word, for which Attie writ. generally used δωμάτιον; ef. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 252 sq.).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κοιτών. This late word = ‘‘ bed-chamber,” which is condemned by Phrynichus (ed. Lobeck, p. 252), may be illustrated from P Tebt I. 12014 (B.c. 97 or 64) ἐν τῶι κοιτῶ(νι), P Oxy I. 767° (A.D. 179) συμπόσιον καὶ κοιτῶνα, 70. IIT. 47178 (ii/a.D.) ἐκ τοῦ] κοιτῶνος ἐξιόντα τὸν παῖδα. This last papyrus κοιτονικὴ μία, , KOKKLVOS «ἐᾷ bed-cover”’ or ‘‘ mattress,” is mentioned on an ostracon containing an inventory of clothing and furniture, 7761. Wecole p- 184, No. 107 (prob. Ptol.). In the inserr. we frequently meet with ὁ ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος = “‘cubicularius,” e.g. OGIS 256° (c. B.C. 130) ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος τῆς βασιλίσσης (other exx, in Magie, p. 73): cf. Ac 127°.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κοιτών (koitōn) — bedroom/chamberlain.

κοιτών, ῶνος, ὁ,

bed-chamber, [Refs 5th c.BC+]chamberlain, [NT+2nd c.AD+]; ἐπὶ κ. Σεβαστοῦ, = Latin cubicularius Augusti, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. grave, [Refs]

3. nursery, ἐν κ. εἶναι to be an infant, minor, [Refs 6th c.AD+]

II. landing-place, [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

κοιτών

koiton

from 2845; a bedroom:--+ chamberlain.

see GREEK for 2845

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κοιτών, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a bed-chamber

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κοιτών koitōn 1x

a bed-chamber, Acts 12:20*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

κοιτών κοιτών, ῶνος, κοίτη a bed-chamber, ὁ ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος a chamberlain, praefectus cubiculi, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bed'-cham-ber.

See BED.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%bedchamber

bedchamber100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceκοιτών · 1× in the New Testament

Acts

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 5th c. AD 2nd c. AD

P.Mich. 5 253ArsinoitesAD 30

μοι ἥμισυ μέρος μητρικοῦ οἴκου ἑνὸς ἐπιπέδου καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος ἕτερον ἥμισυ μέρος κοιτῶνος λεγομένου ἀδορωτὸν καὶ τῶν συνκυρόντων πάντων ἐν Τεβτύνει καὶ εἰσόδων καὶ ἐξόδων, ὧν γείτονες

P.Giss. 1 67HermopolitesAD 118

ξενικῶν ξύλων τὸν ἀπαρτισμὸν τῶν ἐπὶ τόπων ξύλων πρὸ ὀφθαλμῶν ἔχει. ὁ μὲν πρῶτος κοιτὼν ἤδη προ … ν ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ Βουβαστιακὸς ὡσεὶ … ελλ … ση πρεπ

P.Brem. 15Hermopolis (?)AD 118

μόγις ἐπεστήσαμεν τῇ β τῶν ἐπαγομένων τὰ τῆς συμφωνίας θυρώματα τοῦ ἐν τῶι αἰθρίωι κοιτῶνος καὶ γνώμης γέγονεν ὁ ἐπίτροπός σου ἐκ προτροπῆς μου συμφωνῆσαι τὰς δύο θύρας τοῦ

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁof the19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

βασιλέωςbasileus king G935 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine ¶

115× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

A king is a sovereign ruler, as described in Matthew 1:6 and 2:1. This term is used for human rulers, like Herod, and for God as the ultimate king.

Amplified meaning

royal, sovereign

Tyndale gloss

king

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

βασιλεύς (basileus) means 'king' and is used for various rulers, including emperors and the Messiah. It appears in the New Testament in contexts referring to earthly kings, such as Herod and the Roman Emperor, as well as to God and Christ. The term has roots in both classical and biblical Greek, where it signifies authority and leadership.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βασιλεύς, -έως, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מֶלֶךְ;]

a king: Mt 1:6 2:1; used by courtesy of Herod the Tetrarch, Mt 14:9; of the Roman Emperor, as freq. in κοινή (Deiss., LAE, p. 367), I Pe 2:13, 17; of the Christ, in the phrase ὁ β. τ. Ἰουδαίων, Mt 2:2, al.; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mk 15:32, Jo 1:50 12:13; of God, Mt 5:35, I Ti 1:17, Re 15:3; β. βασιλέων, Re 17:14 19:16; β. τ. βασιλευόντων, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βασιλεύς, -€ws, 6, leader of the people, prince, commander, lord of the land, king; univ.: οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, Mt. xvii. 25; Rev. xvi. 14[L T Tr WH om. τῆς γῆς ]» ete.; τῶν ἐθνῶν, Lk. xxii. 25; of the king of Egypt, Acts vii. 10, 18; Heb. xi. 23, 27; of David, Mt.i. 6; Acts xiii. 22; of Herod the Great and his successors, Mt. ii. 1 sqq.; Lk.i.5; Acts xii. 1; xxv. 13; of a tetrarch, Mt. xiv. 9; Mk. vi. 14, 22, (of the son of aking, Xen. oec. 4, 16 ; “reges Syriae, regis Antiochi pueros, scitis Romae nuper fuisse,” Cic. Verr. ii. 4, 27, cf. de senectute 17,59; [Verg. Aen. 9, 2287); of a Roman emperor, 1 Tim. ii. 2; 1 Pet. ii. 17, cf. Rev. xvii. 9 (10), (so in prof. writ. in the Roman age, as in Joseph. b. j. 5, 13, 6; Hdian. 2, 4, 8 [4 Bekk.]; of the son of the emperor, ibid. 1, 5, 15 [5 Bekk.]); of the Messiah, ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, Mt. ii. 2, ete.; τοῦ Ἰσραήλ, Mk. xv. 32; Jn. i. 49…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βασιλεύς. In a letter written not later than B.C. 334 the title of βασιλεύς is adopted by Alexander the Great (Priene 1), and it was a favourite designation of his successors in the Syrian , βασιλεύω and Egyptian monarchies. In this way it became familiar to the Jews of the Dispersion; and when found in the Septuagint as the translation of their vernacular title would be “instinct with present meaning and full of absorbing associations,” as Hicks (C2 i. p. 7) has’ pointed ‘out? In the NT it was transferred to the Roman Emperor (1 Tim 25, 1 Pet 215 17) in accordance with common usage, as borne out by the inscriptions, e.g. 7G IIT. 12", 17°(time of Hadrian), C/G 11. 2721" (time of the Antonines), and the other examples cited by *Magie, p. 62. Similarly Deissmann (LAE, p. 367 f.) brings forward evidence to show that the full title βασιλεὺς βασιλέων (as Rev 1715, 197%) was again “ΕἼ very…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βασιλεύς (basileus) — king.

βᾰσῐλ-εύς, ὁ,

genitive έως, Epic dialect ῆος, [Refs 5th c.AD+] Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+] Aeolic dialect -ηες[Refs 7th c.BC+] old Attic dialect -ῆς[Refs 5th c.BC+]:— king, chief, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: frequently with collateral sense of captain or judge, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later, hereditary king, opposed to τύραννος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but also of tyrants, as Hiero, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Gelo, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of Pisistratus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: joined with a substantive, βασιλεὺς ἀνήρ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄναξ β. lord king, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἰωνῶν β., of the eagle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: comparative βασιλεύτερος more kingly, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: superlative βασιλεύτατος [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βασιλεύς

basileus

probably from 939 (through the notion of a foundation of power); a

sovereign (abstractly, relatively, or figuratively):--king.

see GREEK for 939

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βασιλεύς, έως, ὁ

n.m.

a king, ruler, emperor

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βασιλεύς basileus 115x

a king, monarch, one possessing regal authority

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βασιλεύς deriv. uncertain a king, chief, Hom.: later it was an hereditary king, opp. to τύραννος, Hdt., attic; ἄναξ β. lord king, Aesch.: c. gen., β. νεῶν id. Aesch.; οἰωνῶν β., of the eagle, id=id. Aesch.:—Hom. has a comp. βασιλεύτερος more of a king, more kingly, Sup. βασιλεύτατος most kingly.

of the king's son, prince, or any one sharing in the government, Od.

generally, a lord, master, householder, Il., Pind.

at Athens, the second of the nine Archons was called βασιλεύς; he had charge of the public worship, and the conduct of criminal processes, Plat., etc.

after the Persian war, the king of Persia was called βασιλεύς (without the Art.), Hdt., attic; more rarely ὁ βασιλεύς, or ὁ μέγας βας. Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

Easton's Bible Dictionary

King

Is in Scripture very generally used to denote one invested with authority, whether extensive or limited. There were thirty-one kings in Canaan (Josh. 12:9, 24), whom Joshua subdued. Adonibezek subdued seventy kings (Judg. 1:7). In the New Testament the Roman emperor is spoken of as a king (1 Pet. 2:13, 17); and Herod Antipas, who was only a tetrarch, is also called a king (Matt. 14:9; Mark 6:22).

This title is applied to God (1 Tim. 1:17), and to Christ, the Son of God (1 Tim. 6:15, 16;

Smith's Bible Dictionary

"a chief ruler, one invested with supreme authority over a nation, tribe or country." --Webster. In the Bible the word does not necessarily imply great power or great extent of country. Many persons are called kings whom we should rather call chiefs or leaders. The word is applied in the Bible to God as the sovereign and ruler of the universe, and to Christ the Son of God as the head and governor of the Church. The Hebrews were ruled by a king during a period of about 500 years previous to the destruction of Jerusalem, B.C. 586. The immediate occasion of the substitution of a regal form of government for that of judges seems to have been the siege of Jabesh-gilead by Nahash king of the Ammonites. (1 Samuel 11:1; 12:12) The conviction seems to have forced itself on the Israelites that they could not resist their formidable neighbor…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Called KING OF KINGS Ezr 7:12; Eze 26:7; Da 2:37

→ Divinely authorized De 17:15; 1Sa 9:16,17; 16:12; 1Ch 22:10; 2Ch 2:11,12; Pr 8:15; Da 2:21,37; 4:17; 5:20; Ho 8:4; 13:11

→ How chosen

By divine appointment, Saul 1Sa 10:1

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

73%king

king73% · 84×kings23% · 27×o king3% · 3×other renderings1% · 1×

115 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject32%predicate21%adverbial17%object16%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 115 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,ὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

δέbut, on the otheἡγεμώνa governorπροφήτηςa prophet, poet

δέbut, on the other ha

ὁArticle the

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu

οὐρανόςthe sky, the hea

χαίρωI rejoice, am glad

λέγωI say, speakαὐτός

βασιλεύςking115×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸουδαῖοςJewishγῆthe earth, soil,ἔθνοςa race, people,

καίand, even, also, nam

πᾶςall, the whole, ὁArticle theἡγεμώνa governor

εἰμίI am, exist

ὁArticle theσύἐγώ

σύ

ἔρχομαιI come, goσταυρόωI crucify

ἈγρίππαςAgrippa

ὅπωςhow, in order thἡγέομαιI lead, thinkοὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβασιλεύς · 115× in the New Testament

Matthew Revelation Acts John Mark Luke Hebrews 1 Timothy 1 Peter 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament10 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἸουδαῖοςJewish×γῆthe earth, soil, land×βασιλεύςa king, ruler, emperor×ἈγρίππαςAgrippa×ἩρῴδηςHerod×ἸσραήλProp×ἡγεμώνa governor×ἕτεροςanother, different×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מֶ֫לֶךְking78%H4428 · 696 verses

Counted over the 887 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Didache

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 56c. AD 40

τοῦ δὴ σύμπαντος χρόνου διανεμηθέντος εἰς δύο τμήματα, ἡμέραν τε καὶ νύκτα, τῆς μὲν ἡμέρας τὸ κράτος ὁ πατὴρ ἀνεδίδου τῷ ἡλίῳ, οἷα μεγάλῳ βασιλεῖ, τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς σελήνῃ καὶ τῷ πλήθει τῶν ἄλλων ἀστέρων.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.4c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ οὕτως καὶ ὁ προφήτης: Βασιλεῖαι δέκα ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς βασιλεύσουσιν, καὶ ἐξαναστήσεται ὄπισθεν μικρὸς βασιλεύς, ὃς ταπεινώσει τρεῖς ὑφ̓ ἓν τῶν βασιλέων.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐπιπορευομένωι ἄκυρος ἔστω, καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπελθὼν ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα ϛ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσιν ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον ἐπάναγκον αὐτῷ ἔστω ποιεῖν κατὰ τὰ προγεγραμμένα.

P.Bad. 2 16Pathyris89 BC

κεχειροτονημένα. καλῶς ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς τὰ πράγματα εὔνοιαν διατηροῦντες … ε … παρὰ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς Θηβαίδος. ὅπως

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ᾐτοῦντοaiteō they were seeking G154 Verb · imperfect · middle · indicative · third person · plural ¶

70× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

To ask or request something from someone, like in Matthew 7:7 where Jesus says to ask and it will be given to you.

Amplified meaning

requested, petitioned

Tyndale gloss

to ask

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἰτέω (aiteō) means to ask or request, often with an accusative case for the thing requested or the person being asked. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 7:7 and James 1:6. The word can also imply a demand or a petition, and it is noted that it has similarities with other terms like ἐρωτάω (erōtaō), though they are not entirely synonymous.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — αἰτέω, ἐρωτάω from a scan

TueEse words are often rendered by our Translators as though they covered the same spaces of meaning, the one as the other; nor can we object to their rendering, in numerous instances, αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν alike by our English ‘to ask.’ Yet sometimes they have a little marred the perspicuity of their translation by not varying their word, where the original has shown them the way. For example, the obliteration at John xvi. 23 of the distinction between αἰτεῖν and ἐρωτᾶν might easily suggest a wrong interpretation of the verse,—as though its two clauses were in near connexion, and direct antithesis,—being indeed in none. In our Version we read: ‘In that day ye shall ask Me nothing [ἐμὲ οὐκ ἐρωτήσετε οὐδέν]. Verily, verily, I say unto you, Whatsoever ye shall ask [ὅσα dv αἰτήσητε) the Father in my name, He will give it you.” Now every one competent to judge is agreed, that “ ye shall ask” of…

Read the full entry →

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰτέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁאל;]

to ask, request: absol., Mt 7:7, Ja 1:6; c. acc. pers., Mt 5:42, Lk 6:30; c. acc. rei, seq. ἀπό, Mt 20:20, I Jo 5:15; id. seq. παρά, Ac 3:2, Ja 1:5; c. dupl. acc. Mt 7:9, Mk 6:22, Jo 16:23. Mid. (on the distinction bet. mid. and act., v. M, Pr., 160): absol., Mk 15:8, Jo 16:26, Ja 4:3; c. acc. rei, Mt 14:7, Mk…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰτέω, -ῶ; fut. αἰτήσω:; 1 aor. ἤτησα: pf. ἤτηκα ; Mid., pres. αἰτοῦμαι ; impf. ἠτούμην ; fut. αἰτήσομαι ; 1 aor. ἡτησάμην ; [fr. Hom. down]; to ask; mid. to ask for one’s self, request for one’s self; absol.: Jas. i. 6; Mt. vii. 7; mid., Jas. iv. 3; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8; aireiσθαί τι, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24; x. 38; xi. 24; xv. 43; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 52; Acts xxv. 3, 15, ete. ; αἰτεῖν with ace. of the pers. to whom the request is made: Mt. v. 42; vi. 8; Lk. vi. 30; αἰτεῖσθαι with acc. of the pers. asked for— whether to be released, Mt. xxvii. 20; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mre. παραιτ. q- v-]; Lk. xxiii. 25; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 21; αἰτεῖν τι ἀπό twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.; [Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so αἰτεῖσθαι in Plut. Galb. 20) [ef. B. 149 (130)]; ri παρά τινος, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mre. WH mrg.; Jas. i.5; 1 Jn.…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἰτέω. The ordinary meaning of this word ‘‘to make a request,” ““to ask for something” is borne out by the papyri, e.g. P Fay 109} (carly i/A.D.) αἴτησον Σάραν τὰς τοῦ (δραχμὰς) uB, ‘‘ask Saras for the twelve (silver) drachmae.” In ἐῤ. 121. (c, A.D. 100) it is construed with the accusative of the thing and παρά, τὸ δέρμα τοῦ μόσχου οὗ ἐθύ[σ]αμεν αἴτησον παρὰ τοῦ] κύρτου βυρσέως, “ask the hunchbacked tanner for the hide of the calf that we sacrificed ” (Edd.): cf. Ac 3%. See further σοῦ. ἐρωτάω, and for the distinction between active and middle Pvo/eg., p. 160f. If the middle connotes a greater degree of earnestness, it is natural that it should be more frequent than the active, as for example in the phrases αἰτούμενος λόγον SyA@ . . . (P Hamb I, 65 (A.D. 129), αἰτούμενος... ὀνόματα... δίϑομει (GU I. 91° a.p. 170-1), and see the list of passages in the index to Sy// (iii. p. 245). The…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰτέω (aiteō) — to ask.

αἰτ-έω

(Aeolic dialect αἴτημι [Refs 5th c.BC+], Ionic dialect imperfect αἴτεον[Refs 5th c.BC+]future αἰτήσω: aorist ᾔτησα: perfect ᾔτηκα[NT]: pluperfect ᾐτήκει[Refs 2nd c.AD+]perfect passive ᾔτημαι, etc.:—ask, beg, absolutely, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. mostly with accusative of things, ask for, demand, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὁδὸν αἰ. ask leave to depart, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἰ. τινί τι to ask something for one,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative person et of things, ask a person for a thing, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δίκας αἰ. τινὰ φόνου to demand satisfaction from one for.., [NT+6th c.BC+]

3. with accusative person et infinitive, ask one to do, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

4. with accusative only, beg of, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

5. in Logic, postulate, assume, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰτέω

aiteo

of uncertain derivation; to ask (in genitive case):--ask, beg, call

for, crave, desire, require. Compare 4441.

see GREEK for 4441

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰτέω

v.

I ask, request, beg, petition

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰτέω aiteō 70x

to ask, request; demand; desire, Acts 7:46

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰτέω to ask, beg, Od., etc.

c. acc. rei, to ask for, crave, demand, Hom., etc.; ὁδὸν αἰτ. to beg one's departure, i. e. ask leave to depart, Od.:—c. acc. pers. et rei, to ask a person for a thing, Hom., etc.; δίκας αἰτ. τινὰ φόνου to demand satisfaction from one for murder, Hdt.

c. acc. pers. et inf. to ask one to do, Od., etc.

Mid. to ask for oneself, to claim, Aesch., etc.:—but often used just like Act.

Pass.:

of persons, to have a thing begged of one, Hdt., Thuc.

of things, to be asked, τὸ αἰτεόμενον Hdt., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-IMI-3P — Verb · imperfect · middle · indicative · third person · plural
imperfect middle indicative — a continuing action in past time.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IMI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

17%asking

asking17% · 12×you ask6% · 4×we shall ask6% · 4×do ask6% · 4×you may ask6% · 4×he will ask for4% · 3×you shall ask4% · 3×ask for3% · 2×other renderings49% · 34×

70 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 70 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forπροσκυνέωI worshipΠιλᾶτοςPilate

ὁArticle the

γάρforἀγαθόςgoodἅγιοςset apart, holy,

ἐάνCond

ὅς

ἄνDisj

ὅσοςτὶςσύ

ὅς

ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thφυλακήa watching, guarὑπέρ

αἰτέωthey were seeking70×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

σῶμαbody, fleshυἱόςa son, descendenδέbut, on the othe

καίand, even, also, nam

δίδωμιI offer, giveοὐNegγίνομαιI come into bein

αὐτός

σταυρόωI crucifyκαίand, even, also,

σύ

δίδωμιI offer, giveποιέωI do, makeλόγοςa word, speech,

λαμβάνωI receive, take

καίand, even, also,ἀπό

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἰτέω · 70× in the New Testament

Matthew John Luke Acts Mark 1 John James Ephesians 1 Corinthians 1 Peter Colossians

Across the New Testament11 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

δίδωμιI offer, give×ἐάνCond×λαμβάνωI receive, take×ἄνDisj×παρά×πίνωI drink, imbibe×ΠιλᾶτοςPilate×ὅσος×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שָׁאַלask, inquire78%H7592 · 18 verses

Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 72c. AD 40

„εἰ“ γάρ φησιν „ἀποκριθεὶς εἴποι ὁ παῖς Ἠγάπηκα τὸν κύριόν μου καὶ τὴν γυναῖκά μου καὶ τὰ παιδία, οὐκ ἄπειμι ἐλεύθερος“, ἀχθεὶς πρὸς τὸ κριτήριον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ δικαστοῦ τυχὼν αὐτοῦ βέβαιον σχήσει ὃ ᾐτήσατο, πρότερον τρυπηθεὶς τὸ οὖς ὀπητίῳ (Exod.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.245c. AD 75–95

εὔχεται μὲν οὖν τῷ θεῷ Ῥεβέκκαν, ἣν τῷ παιδὶ Ἅβραμος μνηστευσόμενον ἐξαπέστειλεν, εἰ κατὰ νοῦν τὸν αὐτοῦ μέλλει ὁ γάμος οὗτος συντελεῖσθαι, ἐν ἐκείναις εὑρεθῆναι γνωρισθῆναι τε αὐτὴν τῶν μὲν ἄλλων αἰτοῦντι ποτὸν ἀρνουμένων ἐκείνης δὲ αὐτῷ…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 36.4c. AD 96

Υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε: αἴτησαι παῤ ἐμοῦ, καὶ δώσω σοι ἔθνη τὴν κληρονομίαν σου καὶ τὴν κατάσχεσίν σου τὰ πέρατα τῆς γῆς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Sijp. 56OxyrhynchitesAD 1–AD 100

μα δικέλλας ὅσας ἐὰν δύνῃ τῷ ἐλαιῶνι … … ν τῷ σῷ ὅδε εἰμὶ αἰτήσας … σε ἐκκόψαι ἑκατὸν καὶ δέκα … ς. … δύο ἐπιμεληθῆναι Ἀσκλᾶς … ἀποκαταστήσει

P.Mich. 9 568Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 92

γενείωι ἐξ ἀριστερῶν ἐπάναγκον τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν Ταευήμερον ἀποδώσειν τῶι Μάρκῳ Ἀνθεστίῳ Γεμέλλῳ ἐν αἷς ᾐτήσατο αὐτὸν εἰς συμπεριφορὰν τῆς ἀποδόσεως ἡμέραις πέντε ἀπὸ τῆς προκειμένης τὰς ὀφειλομένας τῇ τοῦ

P. Mich. 9 569Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 92

γενείωι ἐξ ἀριστερῶν ἐπάναγκον τὴν ὁμολογοῦσαν Ταευήμερον ἀποδώσειν τῷ Μάρκωι Ἀνθεστίωι Γεμέλλωι ἐν αἷς ᾐτήσατο αὐτὸν εἰς συνπεριφορὰν τῆς ἀποδόσεως ἡμέραις πέντε ἀπὸ τῆς προκειμένης τὰς ὀφειλομένας τῇ τοῦ

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

εἰρήνην,eirēnē peace, G1515 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

92× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means peace, and is used in the Bible to describe a state of harmony, prosperity, or freedom from war. For example, in Luke 14:32 and Romans 14:17, it's used to talk about peace between people or nations. It's like saying 'let's have peace and quiet, and live in rest and harmony'.

Amplified meaning

harmony, tranquility

Tyndale gloss

peace

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word εἰρήνη (i.e., *eirene*) means 'peace' and is derived from a verb meaning 'to join.' It encompasses various aspects of peace, including public tranquility, harmony between individuals, and spiritual peace, often associated with the blessings of Christ's kingdom. The New Testament uses it in contexts of both personal and communal peace, as well as in salutations.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰρήνη, -ης, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly for שָׁלוֹם ;]

peace;

of public peace, freedom from war: Lk 14:32, Ac 12:20 24:2; of the church, Ac 9:31.

Of peace between persons, concord, agreement : Mt 10:34, Lk 12:51, Ro 14:17, I Co 7:15, Ga 5:22, Ja 3:18; ζητεῖν εἰ., I Pe 3:11; διώκειν, II Ti 2:22; ib. seq. μετὰ πάντων,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰρήνη, -ns, 9, (apparently fr. εἴρω to join; [al. fr. εἴρω i.q-Aéyo; Etym. Magn. 303, 41; Vaniéek p. 892; Lob. Path. Proleg. p. 194; Benfey, Wurzellex. ii. p. 7]), Sept. chiefly for Dw; [fr. Hom. down]; peace, i. e. l. a state of national tranquillity ; exemption from the rage and havoc of war: Rey. vi. 4; πολλὴ εἰρήνη, Acts xxiv. 2 (3) ; τὰ [WH txt. om. τά] πρὸς εἰρήνην, things that look towards peace, as an armistice, conditions for the restoration of peace, Lk. xiv. 32; αἰτεῖσθαι εἰρήνην, Acts xii. 20; ἔχειν εἰρήνην, of the church free from persecutions, Acts TS (ols 2. peace between individuals, i. e. harmony, concord: Mt. x. 34; Lk. xii. 51; Acts vii. 26; Ro. xiv. 17; 1 Co. vii. 15; Gal. v.22; Eph.ii.17; iv.3; i.q. the author of peace, Eph. ii. 14 [ef. B. 125 (109)]; ἐν εἰρήνῃ, where harmony prevails, in a peaceful mind, Jas. iii. 18 ; ὁδὸς εἰρήνης, way leading to peace, a course…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰρήνη. P Strass I. 58 (A.D. 262) ἀνάξια [τ]ῆς ὑπὸ σοῦ πᾶσιν ἡμῖν πρυτανευομένης εἰρή[ν]ης ὁ πρεσβύτης παθών, P Goodsp Cairo 15 (A.D. 362) τὰ τετολμημένα εἰς ἐμὲ ἐν τοιαύτῃ πρ[υ]Ἱτα[ν]ευομένῃ εἰρήνῃ τοῦ δεσπότου [ἡ]μῶν βασιλέως Φλαονίου ᾿Ιουλιανοῦ αἰωνίου ᾿Α [γο]ύστου, ‘* the things perpetrated against me in the tranquillity enjoyed under our lord king Flavius Julianus, eternal Augustus” (Ed.). P Oxy I. 645 (iii/iv A.D.) shows an order for arrest addressed ἐπιστάτῃ > Ζ εἰρηνικὸς εἰρήνης κώμης Τήεως : cf. 16. XII. 15079 (111,4.0.),ὄ 26. 1.559 (A.D. 341) ἐπόπτῃ εἰρήνης ᾿Οξυρυγχίτου, and Preisigke 4636 (iii/A.p.) a list of police officials including εἰρηνοφύλακες. P Oxy I. 41” (iii/iv a.p.) εἰρήνη πόλεως (voc.), addressed to a strategus, is worth quoting in connexion with Eph 2*. From Christian sources we may quote Ramsay C. and δ. ii, p. 720 No. 655 (prob. iii/A.D.) εἰρήν[η] πάσῃ τῇ…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰρήνη (eirēnē) — peace.

εἰρήν-η

(see. below), ἡ, peace, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ εἰρήνης in time of peace, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰ. τἀκεῖθεν τέκνοις on that side they have peace, have naught to fear, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. γίγνεται peace is made, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence later, a peace, treaty of peace, ἡ βασιλέως εἰ. [Refs]; εἰ. ποιεῖν 'Αρμενίοις καὶ Χαλδαίοις make peace between.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. κατεργάζεσθαι, πράττειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰρήνην δέχεσθαι to accept it,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. ἄγειν keep peace, be at peace, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εἰ. ἄγειν (variant{ἔχειν}) enjoy peace, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λύειν break it, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; πολλὴ εἰ. τινὸς γίγνεται profound peace, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν εἰρήνῃ λέγειν, τὸν βίον διάγειν, [Refs]; πόλεμον εἰρήνης χάριν [αἱρεῖσθαι] [Refs 4th c.BC+]; εἰρήνης ἄρξας, ={εἰρηναρχήσας}…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰρήνη

eirene

probably from a primary verb eiro (to join); peace (literally or

figuratively); by implication, prosperity:--one, peace, quietness,

rest, + set at one again.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰρήνη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

peace, peace of mind

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰρήνη eirēnē 92x

peace, Lk. 14:32; Acts 12:20; tranquillity, Lk. 11:21; Jn. 16:33; 1 Thess. 5:3; concord, unity, love of peace, Mt. 10:34; Lk. 12:51; meton. the author of peace, Eph. 2:14; from the Hebrew every kind of blessing and good, Lk. 1:79; 2:14, 29; meton. a salutation expressive of good wishes, a benediction, blessing, Mt. 10:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰρήνη εἰρήνη, ἡ, peace, time of peace, Hom., etc.; ἐπ᾽ εἰρήνης in peace, Il.; εἰρ. γίγνεται peace is made, Hdt.; εἰρήνην ποιεῖν or ποιεῖσθαι to make a peace; εἰρ. ἄγειν to keep peace, Ar.; λύειν to break it, Dem.

deriv. uncertain

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

pes (shalom; eirene):

1. In the Old Testament:

Is a condition of freedom from disturbance, whether outwardly, as of a nation from war or enemies, or inwardly, within the soul. The Hebrew word is shalom (both adjective and substantive), meaning, primarily, "soundness," "health," but coming also to signify "prosperity," well-being in general, all good in relation to both man and God. In early times, to a people harassed by foes, peace was the primary blessing. In Ps 122:7, we have "peace" and "prosperity," and in 35:27; 73:3, shalom is translated "prosperity." In 2Sa 11:7 the King James Version, David asked of Uriah "how Joab did" (margin "of the peace of Joab"), "and how the people did (the Revised Version (British and American) "fared," literally, "of the peace of the people"), and…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ EXEMPLIFIED

By Abraham Ge 13:8,9

Abimelech Ge 26:29

Mordecai Es 10:3

David Ps 120:7

See CHARITABLENESS

See NATION, PEACE OF

→ SOCIAL Ge 45:24; Le 26:6; Job 5:23,24; Ps 34:14; 120:6,7; 133:1; Pr 12:20; 15:17; 16:7; 17:1,14; 20:3; Ec 4:6; Isa 2:4; 45:7; Jer…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- God is the author of

Ps 147:14; Isa 45:7; 1Co 14:33

- RESULTS FROM

. Heavenly wisdom

Jas 3:17

. The government of Christ

Isa 2:4

. Praying for rulers

1Ti 2:2

. Seeking the peace of those with whom we dwell

Jer 29:7

- Necessary to the enjoyment of life

Ps 34:12,14; 1Pe 3:10,11

- GOD BESTOWS UPON THOSE WHO

. Obey him

Le 26:6

. Please him

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

100%peace

peace100% · 92×

92 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject47%object27%adverbial19%predicate8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 92 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

σύτιμήa price, honorζωήlife

ὁArticle the

θεόςGod, a godκαίand, even, also,ἔρχομαιI come, go

ἐν

σύαὐλήcourt-yard, foreπορεύομαιI travel, journe

εἰς

πορεύομαιI travel, journeὑπάγωI go away, deparαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

πρῶτοςSupκαίand, even, also,ὅτανwhen, whensoever

εἰρήνηpeace,92×

what comes after →

ἀπό

θεόςGod, a godὁArticle the

σύ

ἐπίπρόςεἰCond

ὁArticle the

οἶκοςa house, househoἐμόςἐγγύςnear

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existδόξαhonor, renown, gχαράjoy, gladness

εἰμίI am, exist

μετάὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰρήνη · 92× in the New Testament

Luke Romans Ephesians Acts John 1 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians Galatians

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

χάριςgrace, favor, kindness×ἀπό×πατήρfather, Father, ancestor×ἀγάπηlove×πορεύομαιI travel, journey, go×πίστιςfaith, belief, trust×ἔλεοςpity, mercy×δικαιοσύνηjustice, justness, righteousness×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

שָׁלוֹםcompleteness, soundness, welfare, peace60%H7965 · 62 verses

Counted over the 103 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.179c. AD 75–95

Ἅβραμος δὲ τοὺς τῶν Σοδομιτῶν σώσας αἰχμαλώτους, οἳ ληφθέντες ἔφθησαν ὑπὸ τῶν Ἀσσυρίων, καὶ τὸν συγγενῆ Λῶτον ἀνέζευξεν μετὰ εἰρήνης.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 6th c. AD

P.Mil.Vogl. 3 170Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 126

κατὰ τὴν στρατηγίαν τῆς αὐτῆς μερίδος παρὰ Κρονίωνος τοῦ Χεῶτος ἀπὸ Τεβτύνεως. ἐμισθωσάμην παρὰ Εἰρήνης Ἡρακλείδου περὶ κώμην Κερκῆσιν κλήρου ἀρούρας δέκα δύο ἥμισυ καὶ κταμίων ἀρούρας ιβ 𐅵·

P.Mil.Vogl. 3 178Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 140

Ἀσκληπιάδηι Ἀσκληπιάδου μητρὸς Εἰρήνης Ἡρακλείδου παρὰ Ἁρπαήσεως τοῦ Κρονίωνος καὶ Σασώπεως ἑτέρου Κρονίωνος, ἀμφοτέρων ἀπὸ κώμης Τεβτύνεως, Περσῶν

P.Bodl. 1 34Philadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 158–AD 159

Ῥουβρίᾳ Σουπερσίλλῃ τῇ καὶ Εἰρήνῃ κληρονόμῳ Ἀντωνίου Πρόκλου νομάρχῃ Ἀρσινοείτου παρά … ς Διδύμου τοῦ Διδύμου Σωσικοσμίου τοῦ καὶ

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

διὰdia because of G1223 Preposition ¶

667× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Means through or because of, like in Matthew 2:12 where the wise men left by another route. It shows cause or occasion, as in 1 Corinthians 3:15, being saved through fire. It can also describe a state or condition, like in Romans.

Tyndale gloss

through/because of

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διά (dia) is a preposition meaning 'through' and can govern both the genitive and accusative cases. It covers a range of uses, including indicating motion through space or time, causation, and means or instrumentality. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as in Matthew 2:12 and Romans 8:25. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

διά (before a vowel δ’, exc. Ro 8:10, II Co 5:7, and in pr. names; Tdf., Pr., 94),

prep. c. gen., acc, as in cl.;

c. gen., through;

of Place, after verbs of motion or action: Mt 2:12 12:43, Mk 2:23, Lk 4:30, Jo 4:4, II Co 11:33, al.; σώζεσθαι (διας-) δ. πυρός, ὕδατος, I Co 3:15, I Pe 3:20; βλέπειν δ. ἐσόπτρου, I Co 13:12; metaph., of a state or condition:

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

διὰ παντός [so L WH Tr (exc. Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53)], or written together διαπαντός [so GT (exe. in Mt.) ; ef. W. 46 (45); Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 125], continually, always: Mt. xviii. 10; Mk. ν. 5; Lk. xxiv. 53; Acts ii. 25 (fr. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 8); x. 2; xxiv. 16; Ro. xi. 10 (fr. Ps. Ixviii. (Lxix.) 24); 2 Th. iii. 16; Heb. ix. 6; xiii. 15, (often in Grk. writ.). b. of the time within which a thing is done: διὰ τῆς νυκτός (1, Τ Tr WH διὰ νυκτός), by night, Acts ν. 19; xvi. 9; xvii. 10; xxiii. 31, (Palaeph. 1,10); δύ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα, repeatedly within the space of forty days, Acts i. 3;— (denying this use of the prep., C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 164 sq. would refer these instances to the use noted under a. [see Win., Ellic., Mey. u. s.]). 2. of time elapsed, and which has, so to say, been passed through: Gal. ii. 1 [ef. W. 380 (356)]; δὲ ἡμερῶν, (some) days…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διά (A.D. 58) ἀπεσχηκυῖαι [παρὰ τοῦ ᾿Αντ]ιφάνους διὰ χειρὸς [ἐϊξ οἴκου ὃ καὶ ἐπε[ίσθη]σαν κεφάλαιον, ‘have received from Antiphanes from hand to hand in cash the sum which they severally consented to accept ” (Edd.). Among other stereotyped phrases may be mentioned διὰ παντός, common in papyri as in Bibl. Greek in place of the obsolescent ἀεί : thus P Lond 42° (B.c. 168) (=I. p. 30, Selections Ὁ. 9) σοῦ διὰ παντὸς μνείαν ποιούμενοι, LGU IV. 1078* (A.p. 39) Σαραπίων Σαραπιάδι τῇ ἀδελφῇ πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ διὰ παντὸς ὑγιαίνειν. A rather different temporal use appears in διὰ νυκτός, “by night’ (Ac 519 etc.), as P Ryl II. 1381 (A.D. 34) κατέλαβα τοῦτον διὰ νυκτὸς ἡλμένον ἐξ ὑπερβατῶν els τὠιὸ τῆς οὐσίας ἐποίκιον Δρομήως λεγώμενου (7. ε. -όμενον), “ΕἼ detected him when under cover of night he had sprung into the farmstead” (Edd.): it is hard to imagine Fritzsche (see Grimm) arguing that here…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διά (dia) — through/because of.

διά,

poetry διαί (Aeolic dialect ζά, which see), preposition governing genitive and accusative — Rad. sense, through; never anastrophic [Prop. δῐᾰ: but [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses ῑ at the beginning of a line, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: also ᾱ, for the sake of meter, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+] uses διαί in Lyric poetry, [Refs]

__A WITH GEN.

__A.I of Place or Space:

__A.I.1 of motion in a line, from one end to the other, right through, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] frequently of the effect of weapons, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε.. ἔγχος καὶ διὰ θώρηκος.. [Refs 8th c.BC+] out through the Scaean gate, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; διὰ Τρώων πέτετο straight through them,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in Compos. with πρό and ἐκ, see at {διαπρό},{διέκ}: in adverbial phrases, διὰ πασῶν (i.e.…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

διά

dia

a primary preposition denoting the channel of an act; through (in very

wide applications, local, causal, or occasional):--after, always,

among, at, to avoid, because of (that), briefly, by, for (cause) ...

fore, from, in, by occasion of, of, by reason of, for sake, that,

thereby, therefore, X though, through(-out), to, wherefore, with

(-in). In composition it retains the same general importance.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διά

Prep.

through, on account of

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διά dia 667x

(1) gen., through, used of place or medium, Mt. 7:13; Lk. 6:1; 2 Cor. 11:33; through, of time, during, in the course of, Heb. 2:15; Acts 5:19; through, of immediate agency, causation, instrumentality, by means of, by, Jn. 1:3; Acts 3:18; of means or manner, through, by, with, Lk. 8:4; 2 Cor. 5:7; 8:8; of state or condition, in a state of, Rom.…

Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

διά through c. gen. through, by means of c. acc.

through.

WITH GEN.:

of Place or Space:

of motion in a line, through, right through, διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε ἔγχος Il.; δι᾽ ἠέρος αἰθέρ᾽ ἵκανεν quite through the lower air even to the ether, id. Il.; διὰ πάντων ἐλθεῖν to go through all in succession, Xen.

of motion through a space, but not in a line, all through, over, διὰ πεδίοιο Il.; δι᾽ ἄστεος Od.

of Intervals of Space, διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων at every 10th battlement, Thuc.; διὰ πέντε σταδίων at a distance of 5 stades, Hdt.

of Time:

throughout, during, διὰ παντὸς τοῦ χρόνου Hdt.; δι᾽ ἡμέρης all day long, id. Hdt.; διὰ παντός continually, Aesch.; δι᾽ ὀλίγου for a short time, Thuc.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

57%through

through57% · 391×because of22% · 153×on account of10% · 67×for2% · 14×the sake of2% · 14×other renderings6% · 44×

683 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial96%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 667 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

θεόςGod, a godπᾶςall, the whole, καυματίζωI burn, scorch

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciἐνώπιονbefore the face

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theδέbut, on the otheσοφόςwise

σύ

ἐνπρόςδίδωμιI offer, give

ἐγώ

καίand, even, also,εἶπονI say, speakἐνώπιονbefore the face

διάbecause of667×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

λόγοςa word, speech, ὄνομαname, character,προφήτηςa prophet, poet

οὗτος

λέγωI say, speakὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,

ὅς

ὁArticle theαἰτίαa cause, reason,καίand, even, also,

αὐτός

ὁArticle theγίνομαιI come into beinκαίand, even, also,

τίςIrg

οὐNegὁArticle theμετά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιά · 667× in the New Testament

Romans Acts John Matthew Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Luke Mark Ephesians Galatians 1 Peter

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

προφήτηςa prophet, poet×εἶπονI say, speak×αἰτίαa cause, reason, charge×θέλημαwill, wish, desire×εἴτεand if, whether×διέρχομαιI pass through, spread a report×νύξthe night, night-time×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

כֵּןadj. right, veritable, honest H3651b כִּי עַל כֵּן f30%H3651 · 204 verses

Counted over the 663 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.7c. AD 100

ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Adl. 12Pathyris102 BC

ἀρουρῶν ἑπτὰ ἀρούρας τρεῖς · γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Adl. 14Pathyris101 BC

ἐν σφραγῖσι δυσίν , ὧν γείτονες μιᾶς μὲν νότου γῆ Πατήφιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πακοίβιος διὰ τῶν Φίβιος υἱῶν, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου καὶ τῶν μετόχων,

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς ὠνῆς.

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τὸho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · neuter ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASN — Article · accusative · singular · neuter
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τρέφεσθαιtrephō being nourished G5142 Verb · present · passive · infinitive ¶

9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for to feed or nourish, used in passages like Matthew 6:26 and Luke 12:24 to describe caring for someone or something. It can also mean to bring up or rear, as in Luke 4:16.

Amplified meaning

nourishment, sustenance

Tyndale gloss

to feed

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τρέφω (i.e., *trepho*) is built from a primary verb meaning to nourish or feed. It encompasses a range of meanings, including to rear, bring up, and support, particularly in the context of children and animals. In the New Testament, it appears in verses like Matthew 6:26 and Luke 12:24, where it refers to nourishing or providing for. The lexicons do not indicate significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τρέφω

[in LXX for חָיָה hi., גָּדַל pi., אָכַל hi., etc. ;]

to make to grow, bring up, rear (cl.; I Mac 3:33 11:39): Lk 4:16 (T, WH, mg., ἀνατ-)

to nourish, feed: Mt 6:26 25:37, Lk 12:24, Ac 12:20, Re 12:6, 14; of a mother, to give suck, Lk 23:29; of animals, to fatten (Je 26 (46):21), fig., Ja 5:5 (cf. ἀνα-, ἐκ-, ἐν-τρέφω).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τρέφω; 1 aor. ἔθρεψα ; Pass., pres. rpépopar; pf. ptep. τεθραμμένος ; fr. Hom. down; to nourish, support; to feed : τινά, Mt. vi. 26; xxv. 37; Lk. xii. 24; Acts xii. 20; Rev. xii. 6, 14; to give suck, Lk. xxiii. 29 LT Tr WH; to fatten, Jas. v. 5 [here A. V. nourish]. to bring up, nurture, Lk. iv. 16 [here T WH mrg. ἀνατρέφω] (1 Mace. iii. 33; xi. 39, and often in prof. auth.). [Comp. : ἐκ-, ev- τρέφω.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τρέφω, “nourish,”’ ‘‘feed.”” In P Eleph 21! (B.c. 285-4) provision is made for the maintenance of parents by their sons— τρεφέτωσαν αὐτοὺς οἱ υἱεῖς πάντες κοινῆι. Cf PSI VI. 5964 (iii/B.C.) ἀφ᾽ οὗ τε γεγόναμεν ἐν Φιλαδελφέαι σὺ ἡμᾶς τέτρεφας, 2ό. 6041 (iii/B.c.) τέφ]τροφα τοὺς ἵππους, P Oxy II. 27514 (contract of apprenticeship—a.D. 66) τοῦ παιδὸς τρεφομένου kal ἱματι(σ)ζομένου ἐπὶ τὸν ὅλον χρόνον, ‘the boy is to be fed and clothed during the whole period,” 26. VI. go824 (A.D. 199) τρεφόντων ὑμῶν τὰ [κ]τήνη χόρτῳ τε καὶ κριθῇ, and P Lips I. 2818 (deed of adoption—a.p. 381) ὅνπερ θρέψω καὶ ἱματίζω (λ ἱματίσω) εὐγενῶς καὶ γνησίως ὡς υἱὸν γνήσιον καὶ φυσικὸν ὡς ἐξ ἐμ]οῦ γενόμενον. For the meaning ‘‘ give suck,” as in Lk 2355, see P Ryl II. 178° (agreement with a nurse—early i/a.D.) τοῦτο θρέψει ἐπὶ τὸν ἐνλείψοντα χρόνον, ‘she shall nurse it for the rest of the time.” In P Oxy XII. 14152?…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τρέφω (trephō) — to feed.

τρέφω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τράφω (see. entry); 1st pers. singular optative τρέφοιν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future θρέψω [Refs]aorist 1 ἔθρεψα, Epic dialect θρέψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἔτρᾰφον (see. infr. B): perfect τέτροφα intransitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+] —middle, future θρέψομαι in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐθρεψάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.:—passive, future τρᾰφήσομαι Ps.-[Refs 4th c.BC+], etc., but in early writers in middle form θρέψομαι (see. above): aorist 1 ἐθρέφθην, Epic dialect θρέφθη [Refs 8th c.BC+], rare in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 6th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἐτράφην [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural ἔτραφεν, τράφεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect τέθραμμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. plural τέθραφθε [Refs 5th c.BC+] [assuming variant] in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive τεθράφθαι [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τρέφω

trepho

a primary verb (properly, threpho; but perhaps strengthened from the

base of 5157 through the idea of convolution); properly, to stiffen,

i.e. fatten (by implication, to cherish (with food, etc.), pamper,

rear):--bring up, feed, nourish.

see GREEK for 5157

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τρέφω

v.

I feed, rear

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τρέφω trephō 9x

to nourish; to feed, support, cherish, provide for,

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τρέφω to thicken or congeal a liquid, γάλα θρέψαι to curdle it. Od.; τυρὸν τρέφειν Theocr.:—Pass., with intr. perf. act. τέτροφα, to become firm, περὶ χροῒ τέτροφεν ἄλκη Od.

to make to grow or increase, to bring up, breed, rear, Hom., etc.; c. acc. cogn., τρ. τινὰ τροφήν τινα to bring up in a certain way, Hdt.:—Mid. to rear for oneself, Od., etc.:—Pass. to reared, grow up, Hom.; κάρτιστοι τράφεν ἄνδρες grew up the strongest men, Il.; ἐξ ὅτου 'τράφην ἐγώ from the time when I left the nursery, Ar.; μιᾶς τρέφει πρὸς νυκτός, i. e. art a child of night, Soph.

of slaves, horses, dogs and the like, to rear and keep them, Hom., etc.; τρ. παιδαγωγούς Aeschin.; τρ. γυναῖκα Eur.;—metaph., αἰγιαλὸν ἔνδον τρέφει he keeps quite a sea-beach in the house…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Verb-PPN — Verb · present · passive · infinitive
present passive infinitive — an action in progress.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5745

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

22%feeds

feeds22% · 2×being nourished11% · 1×you have fattened11% · 1×they may feed11% · 1×she is nourished11% · 1×fed11% · 1×raised11% · 1×they feed11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

οὐράνιοςheavenly

ὁArticle the

καίand, even, also, nam

πεινάωI am hungry, nee

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗwhere, whither,

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle the

οὐNeg

ὅς

τρέφωbeing nourished9×

what comes after →

αὐτός

οὐNegπόσοςὁArticle the

ἤDisj

διψάωI thirst for, de

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in

ὁArticle the

καρδίαthe heart, inner

ἐκεῖthere, yonder, thith

καιρόςfitting season,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτρέφω · 9× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Revelation Acts James

Across the New Testament5 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐκεῖthere, yonder, thither×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.97c. AD 40

τρέφεται δὲ ἡ ψυχὴ ἀναλήψει τῶν καλῶν καὶ πράξει τῶν κατορθωμάτων.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.253c. AD 75–95

πέμπει τοίνυν οὗτος πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἀξιῶν τὴν κόρην ταύτην παιδὶ τῷ ἑαυτοῦ λαβεῖν πρὸς γάμον, ὃς γνήσιός ἐστιν αὐτῷ καὶ μόνος ἐπὶ τοῖς πᾶσι τεθραμμένος.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 19.1.8c. AD 140

παρὰ τοῖς οὖν ἀνθρώποις ἡ πτελέα δοκεῖ καρπὸν μὴ φέρειν, καὶ οὐκ οἴδασιν οὐδὲ νοοῦσιν, ὅτι, ὅταν ἀβροχία γένηται, ἡ πτελέα ἔχουσα ὕδωρ τρέφει τὴν ἄμπελον καὶ ἡ ἄμπελος ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχουσα τὸ ὕδωρ διπλοῦν τὸν καρπὸν ἀποδίδωσι, καὶ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτῆς καὶ ὑπὲρ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC

P.Oxy. 41 2971OxyrhynchosAD 66

αὐτὸν Σεύθην. ὁ δὲ αὐτὸς Σεύθης, ἐὰν μὴ βούληται ὁ παῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ διδασκάλου τρέφεσθαι, χορηγήσει τῇ Τασεῦτι ὑπὲρ τῶν τούτου τροφείων κατὰ μῆνα ἕκαστον ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πέντε καὶ

Aegyptus 13 (1933), p. 518-519 no. 2AntinoopolisAD 151

θεοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ τοῦ καὶ οἰκιστοῦ τῆς πόλεως ἡμῶν εἰς ἡμᾶς εὐεργεσίας καθʼ ἃς ἐβουλήθη τρέφεσθαι τὰ τῶν Ἀντινοέων τέκνα τὰ ἀπογραφόμενα ὑφʼ ἡμῶν τῶν γονέων ἐντὸς ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀφʼ

Aegyptus 63 (1983), p. 107 no. IAntinoopolis (AntinoitesAD 157

φανερὰς ἐποίησεν ἡμῖν τὰς ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ Ἁδριανοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς εὐεργεσίας καθʼ ἃς ἐβουλήθη τρέφεσθαι τοὺς τῶν Ἀντινοέων παῖδας ἀπογραφομένους ὑφʼ ἡμῶν τῶν γονέων ἐντὸς ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀφʼ ἧς

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

αὐτῶνautos their G846 Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine ¶

5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.

Tyndale gloss

it/s/he

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Pron-GPM — Personal pronoun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-GPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

52%him

him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

λέγωI say, speak

καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus

πρός

λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god

αὐτόςtheir5550×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god

καίand, even, also, nam

ὁArticle theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός

λέγωI say, speak

αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast

ἐν

ὁArticle theαὐτόςὅς

εἰς

ὁArticle theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, question, demand of×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τὴνho <the> G3588 Article · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁ<the>19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

χώρανchōra region G5561 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine ¶

28× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for a region or country, used in Matthew 12:2 to describe a place where Jesus and his disciples were walking.

Amplified meaning

country, territory

Tyndale gloss

country

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

χώρα refers to a space or region, often translated as land, country, or territory. It can denote both rural areas as opposed to urban settings and specific regions within a country, such as Galatia or Judea. The New Testament uses it in contexts like Matthew 12:2 and Luke 2:8. The word is derived from a root meaning 'to lie open,' indicating an expanse that can include its inhabitants.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χώρα, -ας, ἡ

[in LXX for אֶרֶץ, מְדִינָה, etc. ;]

most freq. in cl., a space, place.

land, i.e.

a land, country, region: Mt 12:2, Mk 5:10 6:55, Lk 2:8 15:13-15 19:12, Jo 11:54, Ac 13:49 27:27; χ. Γαλατική, Ac 16:6 18:23; Τραχωνίτιδος, Lk 3:1; τ. Ἰουδαίας, Ac 26:20; τ. Ἰουδαίων, Ac 10:39; pl., τῆς Ἰουδαίας κ. Σαμαρείας, Ac 8:1; Γεργεσηνῶν (Γερασηνῶν, Γαδαρηνῶν)

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χώρα, -as, 7, (XAQ [ef. Curtius $179], to lie open, be ready to receive), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for p38, 77°72 ‘a province’; 1. prop. the space lying between two 2. a region or country; i.e. a tract of land: ἡ x. ἐγγὺς τῆς ἐρήμου, Jn. xi. 54; [in an elliptical phrase, ἡ ἀστραπὴ (ἡ) ἀστράπτουσα ἐκ τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν ὑπ᾽ οὐρανὸν λάμπει, ΔΑ. ρατὲ. .. part, Lk. xvii. 24 (cf. W.§ 64, 5) ; on the ellipsis of χώρα in other phrases (ἐξ ἐναντίας, ἐν δεξιᾷ, ete.), see W. 1. c.; B. 82 (72)]; land as opp. to the sea, Acts xxvii. 27; land as inhabited, @ province or country, Mk. v. 10; [vi. 55 L mrg. T Tr WH]; Lk. xv. 13-15; xix. 12; Acts xiii. 49; with a gen. of the name of the region added: Τραχωνίτιδος, Lk. iii. 1; τῆς Ιουδαίας, Acts xxvi. 20; [(or an equiv. adj.) ] Γαλατική, Acts xvi. 6; xviii. 235 τῶν Ἰουδαίων, Acts x. 39; plur. τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, [A. V. regions}, Acts vill. 1…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χώρα. For this word in its widest sense of the ‘terrestrial region,” cf. P Leid ("3 (B.c. 181-143) (=I. p. 42) κυριείαν τῶν [ὑ]Ἱπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶϊν. In P Cairo Zen III. 594514 (iii/B.c.) it refers to exemption from compulsory labour κατὰ τὴν χώραν, ‘throughout the country” or “district,” and for a similar geographical sense we may refer to P Oxy IV. 7098 (c. A.D. 50) τοὺς δὲ λοιποὺς τῆς κάτωι χώρας v[opods] εἰς ᾿Αλεξανδρείαν, with reference to the Delta, and zd. X. 12748 (iii/A.D.) βασιλικῇ ypappareta ᾿Αλεξανδρέων χώρας, “ basilico-grammateus of the territory of the Alexandrians.” Note also the comp. in P Oxy VI. 936° (iii/A.D.) TO προσκύνημά cov ποιῶ παρὰ τοῖς ἐπιχωρίοις θεοῖς, ‘I perform the act of worship on your behalf to the gods of the country” (Edd.), a son to his father. The thought of the ‘‘country” as opposed to the town (cf. Lk 2124, Jn 435, Jas 54) is seen in P Tebt II.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χώρα (chōra) — country.

χώρα,

Ionic dialect χώρη, ἡ, ={χῶρος}, space or room in which a thing is, defined as partly occupied space, distinguished from κενόν and τόπος, [Refs 5th c.BC+] = country[Refs 8th c.BC+]; χώραν τινὶ καταλιπεῖν leave room for it, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. generally, place, spot, στρέψεσθ᾽ ἐκ χώρης ὅθι.. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χώραν ἐκ χώρας μεταβάλλειν move from place to place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; field in a ceiling, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἡ πρώτη χ. the first field (on the chest of Cypselus), [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; socket or cavity of a joint, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of the eye, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; as euphemism for the genital organs, [Refs]

3. the position, proper place of a person or thing, ἐνὶ χώρῃ ἕζεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]: especially a soldier's post, Ἄρης οὐκ ἔνι χώρα is not…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χώρα

chora

feminine of a derivative of the base of 5490 through the idea of empty

expanse; room, i.e. a space of territory (more or less extensive;

often including its inhabitants):--coast, county, fields, ground,

land, region. Compare 5117.

see GREEK for 5117

see GREEK for 5490

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χώρα, ας, ἡ

n.f.

region, land, fields

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χώρα chōra 28x

space, room; a country, region, tract, province, Mk. 5:10; Lk. 2:8; a district, territory, suburbs, Mt. 8:28; meton. the inhabitants of a country, region, etc., Mk. 1:5; Acts 12:20; the country, as opposed to the city or town, Lk. 21:21; a field, farm, Lk. 12:16; Jn. 4:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χώρα χώρα, ionic χώρη, ἡ, = χῶρος the space in which a thing is, Lat. locus, οὐδέ τι πολλὴ χώρη μεσσηγύς Il.; ὀλίγῃ ἐνὶ χώρῃ id. Il.

generally, a place, Hom.

one's place, position, ἐν χώρῃ ἕζεσθαι Il.; esp. a soldier's post, χώραν λείπειν Thuc.; χώραν λαβεῖν to find one's place, ἕως ἂν χώραν λάβῃ τὰ πράγματα till they are brought into position, into order, Xen.

metaph. one's place in life, station, place, position, Ἄρης δ᾽ οὐκ ἐνὶ χώρᾳ the spirit of war is not there, Aesch.; ἐν ἀνδραπόδων or μισθοφόρων χώρᾳ εἶναι to be in the position of slaves or mercenaries, Xen.; ἐν οὐδεμιᾷ χώρᾳ εἶναι to be in no esteem, nullo loco haberi, id. Xen.:—also, κατὰ χώραν (χώρην) εἶναι, ἔχειν to be in one's place, to keep a thing in its place, Hdt., Ar.; κατὰ χ. μένειν to stand…

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

re'-jun: A "district," as in modern English. The word "region" is used by English Versions of the Bible interchangeably with "country," "coasts," etc., for various Hebrew and Greek terms, but "region round about" is usually in the King James Version and invariably in the Revised Version (British and American) the translation of perichoros, "surrounding country." For a possible technical use of "region" in Ac 16:6 and the Revised Version (British and American) 18:23.

See GALATIA.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

54%region

region54% · 15×country21% · 6×land7% · 2×fields7% · 2×regions4% · 1×ground4% · 1×countries4% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial64%subject18%indirect object7%object7%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 28 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

εἰςὅλοςall, the whole, ἐν

εἰς

ἀποδημέωI go into anotheπορεύομαιI travel, journe

Γαλατικόςbelonging to the pro

καίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

ἐν

κάθημαιI sit, am seated

ἸουδαίαJudea

ὁArticle the

χώραregion28×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

Γερασηνόςfrom GeraseneἸουδαίαJudeaΓαδαρηνόςGadarene, belong

καίand, even, also, nam

σκιάa shadow, thick ὁArticle theΛυσανίαςLysanias

ἐκεῖνος

καίand, even, also,

μακρόςlong, distant

καίand, even, also,λαμβάνωI receive, take

αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχώρα · 28× in the New Testament

Luke Acts Mark John Matthew James

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἸουδαίαJudea×ἐκεῖνος×Γερασηνόςfrom Gerasene×ὅλοςall, the whole, entire×μακρόςlong, distant×τέDisj×ΦρυγίαPhrygia×Γαλατικόςbelonging to the province Galatia×

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

גּוֹיnation, people H1471b גּוֹיִם n. pr. gent. Tid‛al ki23%H1471 · 24 verses

Counted over the 104 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 20c. AD 40

καθάπερ οὖν ἡ ἐν τῷ ἀρχιτεκτονικῷ προδιατυπωθεῖσα πόλις χώραν ἐκτὸς οὐκ εἶχεν, ἀλλ’ ἐνεσφράγιστο τῇ τοῦ τεχνίτου ψυχῇ, τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον οὐδ’ ὁ ἐκ τῶν ἰδεῶν κόσμος ἄλλον ἂν ἔχοι τόπον ἢ τὸν θεῖον λόγον τὸν ταῦτα διακοσμήσαντα·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.119c. AD 75–95

περὶ δὲ τοῦ πεδίου τοῦ λεγομένου Σεναὰρ ἐν τῇ Βαβυλωνίᾳ χώρᾳ μνημονεύει Ἑστιαῖος λέγων οὕτως·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.8c. AD 100

καὶ ὅταν γένηται οὕτως, ἄγει ὁ βαστάζων τὸν τράγον εἰς τὴν ἔρημον καὶ ἀφαιρεῖ τὸ ἔριον καὶ ἐπιτίθησιν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ φρύγανον τὸ λεγόμενον ῥαχήλ, οὗ καὶ τοὺς βλαστοὺς εἰώθαμεν τρώγειν ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ εὑρίσκοντες: οὕτω μόνης τῆς ῥαχοῦς οἱ καρποὶ γλυκεῖς εἰσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

4th c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD

P. Lond. 3 p. 124-126 no. 904AlexandriaAD 104

πληρώσωσιν καὶ τῇ προσηκούσῃ αὐτοῖς γεωργίαι προσκαρτερήσωσιν. εἰδὼς μέντοι ὅτι ἐνίων τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς χώρας ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν ἔχει χρείαν βούλομαι πάντας τοὺς εὔλογον δοκοῦντας ἔχειν τοῦ ἐνθάδε ἐπιμένειν

P.Lond. 2 p. 77-78 no. 376ArsinoitesAD 159

βασιλικοῦ γραμματέως Ἀρσινοίτου Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος καὶ τῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ στρατηγοῦ Θεοδώρου αἱρεθέντων εἰς χώραν, F. Preisigke, Wörterbuch II, 765 αὐτοῦ τῇ κ τοῦ ὄντος μηνὸς Μεχεὶρ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος

P.Cair. Isid. 68Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 309–AD 310

ἐν ἀπόρῳ τυγχανόντων ὀνομάτων. οὐδὲν δὲ ἧττον ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν σκεπάσαντες Παήσιον ὃν ἡ χώρα ἐκάλεσεν εἰς ἀπαίτησιν ἀχύρου πάλιν ἐμὲ πειρῶνται τοῦ βαλεῖν ἀντὶ τοῦ Παησίου ἴσως ἀργυρολογήσαντες

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

ἀπὸapo by G575 Preposition ¶

647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.

Amplified meaning

was nourished, relied

Tyndale gloss

away from

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense

International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

82%from

from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

αὐτός

ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr

καίand, even, also, nam

εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen

ὁArticle the

τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus

ἐγώ

ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue

εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind

καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά

ἀπόby647×

what comes after →

ὁArticle the

ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th

αὐτός

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec

σύ

καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,

θεόςGod, a god

πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go

ἀρχήruler, beginning

ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament

Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance

ἀρχήruler, beginning×ἕωςuntil, as far as×αἴρωI raise, lift up×ΓαλιλαίαGalilee×καταβαίνωI go down, come down×εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind×μακρόθενfrom a distance×ἄρχωI begin×

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

τῆςho the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.

Tyndale gloss

the/this/who

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant

Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

64%the

the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

καίand, even, also, nam

αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ

ἐν

καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the

εἰς

αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go

αὐτός

λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός

εἰμίI am, exist

οὗτοςσύἐγώ

ὁthe19783×

what comes after →

θεόςGod, a god

ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ

δέbut, on the other ha

λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply

ἸησοῦςJesus

λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the

πατήρfather, Father, ance

ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament

Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“He was now <the> Herod furiously angry with [the] Tyrians and Sidonians; with one accord then they were coming to him And having gained Blastus who [was] over the bedchamber of the king they were seeking peace, because of <the> being nourished their <the> region by the king’s.”

βασιλικῆς.¶basilikos king’s. G937 Adjective · genitive · singular · feminine ¶

5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×

commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament

In plain English

Meaning

Royal refers to something belonging to a king, like a royal law in James 2:8. It can also describe someone in the service of a king, like a courtier, as seen in John 4:46 and 49.

Amplified meaning

royal, sovereign, land, territory

Tyndale gloss

royal

Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers

Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word βασιλικός (basilikos) means royal or kingly, derived from βασιλεύς (basileus, king). It covers meanings related to kingship, including royal officers and regal qualities, as seen in Acts 12:20-21 and John 4:46-49. Some sources note its metaphorical use for something of the highest excellence, as in James 2:8.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

βασιλικός, -ή, -όν

(< βασιλεύς),

[in LXX for מֶלֶךְ and its cognates;]

royal, belonging to a king: χώρα, Ac 12:20; ἐσθής, Ac 12:21; νόμος β., a supreme law, "a law which governs other laws and so has a specially regal character" (Hort), or because made by a king (LAE, p. 3673), Ja 2:8; τις, one in the service of a king, a courtier, Jo 4:46, 49 (WH, mg., βασιλίσκος).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

βασιλικός, -7, -dv, of or belonging to a king, kingly, royal, regal; of a man, the officer or minister of a prince, a courtier: Jn. iv. 46, 49, (Polyb. 4, 76, 2; Plut. Sol. 27; often in Joseph.). subject to a king: of a country, Acts xii. 20. befitting or worthy of a king, royal: ἐσθής, Acts xii. 21. Hence metaph. principal, chief: νόμος, Jas. ii. 8 (Plat. Min. p. 317 ο. τὸ ὀρθὸν νόμος ἐστὶ βασιλικός, Xen. symp. 1, 8 βασιλικὸν κάλλος ; 4 Mace. xiv. 2).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

βασιλικός is exceedingly common, but we may note P Petr III. 315 (B.C. 240) πορευομένου ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλικῆς ὁδοῦ as coeval with the almost identical phrase of the LXX in Num 20!7. This phrase at a later time was used to render wa γέρας, a Roman road built by the Emperor: see Ramsay CRE, p- 32ff-, where a Latin inser. from Pisidia brings the original back to the time of Augustus. The adj. is applied to the revenue in P Petr III. 261° ὁ πράκτωρ ὃ ἐπὶ τῶν βασιλικιῶὴν προσόδων τεταγμένος, ‘the officer appointed to collect the royal revenues”; Chrves¢. I. 198}* (B.c. 240) τῶι ἐμ Βουβάστωι βασιλικῶι θησαυρῶι. In a papyrus of

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

βασιλικός (basilikos) — royal.

βᾰσῐλ-ικός, ή, όν,

royal, kingly, ποιέεις οὐδαμῶς -κά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; β. [μοναρχία] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to τυραννικός, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; βασιλικοὶ ἀπέβησαν proved themselves truly kingly, [Refs 5th c.BC+], ἡ, art of ruling, [Refs]: comparative -ώτερος [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: superlative βασιλικώτατος καὶ ἄρχειν ἀξιώτατος [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -κῶς, παρών as a king, with kingly authority, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. of or belonging to a king, οἱ β. the king's friends or officers, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἐγκλήματα β. charges of high-treason, [Refs]; ὀφειλήματα β. debts to the king,[Refs]; γραμματεύς[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; γεωργοί [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ὁδὸς β. the king's highway, [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; μὴ εἶναι β. ἀτραπὸν ἐπὶ γεωμετρίαν no…

Read the full entry →

Strong's Greek Dictionary

βασιλικός

basilikos

from 935; regal (in relation), i.e. (literally) belonging to (or

befitting) the sovereign (as land, dress, or a courtier), or

(figuratively) preeminent:--king's, nobleman, royal.

see GREEK for 935

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

βασιλικός, ή, όν

Adj

connected with a king, royal, regal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

βασιλικός basilikos 5x

royal, regal, Acts 12:20, 21; βασιλικός, used as a subst. a person attached to the king, courtier, Jn. 4:46, 49; met. royal, of the highest excellence, Jas. 2:8*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

βασιλικός like βασίλειος royal, kingly, Hdt., attic

like a king, kingly, princely, βασιλικώτατος Xen.:—adv., βασιλικῶς as a king, with kingly authority, id. Hdt.

as Subst.,

βασιλική (sub. στοά), a colonnade at Athens, Plat.; v. στοά.

βασιλικός, ὁ, king's officer, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code

Berean parsing

Adj-GSF — Adjective · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.

Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it

40%royal

royal40% · 2×royal official40% · 2×king’s20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

subject40%object40%adverbial20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament

← what comes before

ὁArticle the

αὐτόςἀπό

τὶς

εἰμίI am, exist

ἐσθήςclothing, raiment

ἐνδύωI put on, clothe

τελέωI end, accomplish, p

νόμοςa law, the Mosai

βασιλικόςking’s.5×

what comes after →

ὅς

ὁArticle the

κύριοςlord, Lord, master,

καταβαίνωI go down, come

καθίζωI set, make to sit

ἐπί

κατά

ὁArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceβασιλικός · 5× in the New Testament

Acts John James

Across the New Testament3 of 27 books

MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev

The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

מֶ֫לֶךְking82%H4428 · 14 verses

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century

Josephus Philo of Alexandria

Philo of AlexandriaOn the Cherubim 63c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ ἐκεῖνόν φασιν, ἡνίκα Εὐρώπης καὶ Ἀσίας ἔδοξεν ἀνάψασθαι τὸ κράτος, ἐν ἐπικαίρῳ χώρῳ στάντα καὶ πάντα περιαθρήσαντα εἰπεῖν, ὅτι „καὶ τὰ τῇδε καὶ τὰ τῇδε ἐμά“, μειρακιώδους καὶ νηπίας καὶ ἰδιωτικῆς τῷ ὄντι ψυχῆς, οὐ βασιλικῆς, ἐπιδειξάμενον…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.179c. AD 75–95

ἀπήντησε δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ τῶν Σοδομιτῶν βασιλεὺς εἰς τόπον τινά, ὃν καλοῦσι πεδίον βασιλικόν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical

2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC

BGU 3 992Pathyris187 BC

Θηβαίδα προσόδων διαγραφὴν τὴν γραφεῖσαν ἔτους ιε Φαῶφι κθ, ὑφʼ ἣν ὑπογράφει Ἁρενδώτης ὁ βασιλικὸς γραμματεὺς τῆς Θηβαίδος Προῖτος Σωσικράτους τιμὴν γῆς ἠπείρου, ἧς διασαφεῖ Ἁρενδώτης ὁ βασιλικὸς γραμματεὺς

C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

τὴν Θηβαίδα διαγραφὴν τὴν γραφεῖσαν ἔτους ιε, Φαῶφι κθ, ὑφʼ ἣν ὑπογράφει Ἁρενδώτης ὁ βασιλικὸς γραμματεὺς τῆς Θηβαίδος, Προῖτος Σωσικράτους τιμὴν γῆς ἠπείρου, ἧς διασαφεῖ Ἁρενδώτης ὁ βασιλικὸς γραμματεὺς

P.Lond. 3 p. 8-9 no. 880Pathyris114 BC

ἐν τῶι περὶ Πάθυριν πεδίωι δωδεκάτην μερίδα ἀδιαίρετον ἀρουρῶν π, ἧς γείτονες νότου χῶμα βασιλικὸν, βορρᾶ ὁδός, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς, λιβὸς διῶρυξ Τελώνος, καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐπιβάλλοντος αὐτῶι μέρους ἄλλης

BSB	Now Herod was in a furious dispute with the people of Tyre and Sidon, and they convened before him. Having secured the support of Blastus, the king’s chamberlain, they asked for peace, because their region depended on the king’s country for food.
KJV	¶ And Herod was highly displeased with them of Tyre and Sidon: but they came with one accord to him, and, having made Blastus the king’s chamberlain their friend, desired peace; because their country was nourished by the king’s country.
ASV	Now he was highly displeased with them of Tyre and Sidon: and they came with one accord to him, and, having made Blastus the king’s chamberlain their friend, they asked for peace, because their country was fed from the king’s country.
YLT	And Herod was highly displeased with the Tyrians and Sidonians, and with one accord they came unto him, and having made a friend of Blastus, who [is] over the bed-chambers of the king, they were asking peace, because of their country being nourished from the king's;
WEB	Now Herod was very angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. They came with one accord to him and, having made Blastus, the king’s personal aide, their friend, they asked for peace, because their country depended on the king’s country for food.
BBE	Now he was very angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon: and they came to him, all together, and having made friends with Blastus, the controller of the king's house, they made a request for peace, because their country was dependent on the king's country for its food.

Acts 12:20 — Word Study

Cite / Share This Page

Deep Study — Acts 12:20

Context — Herod's Dispute with Tyre and Sidongenerated

Cross References

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 19 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

Nave’s Topical Bible — the subjects this verse is filed under

The Key Word — θυμομαχῶν, thumomacheōgenerated

How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

Sentence Structuregenerated

Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Reflection Questionsgenerated

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Modern formal

Tyndale line

Strictly literal

From the Latin

Simplified

Word by word, the decisions they made

The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Word by word, across the editions

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

Lexicons — every word in Acts 12:20

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →

← what comes before

what comes after →